30252
69
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/79
Pagina verder
Contents
Page
lntroduction
welcome
to the
PRoFI mc 3010
.........
About this
manual .................
The legal side
Quickstart
....i,
I. The transmitter
The
hardware
Transmitter
front face. notes on oDeration
..........................4
Opening
and closing the
transmitter,
changing
the RF module
.......................5
Transmitter back
panel
......................................................6
lnside the
transmitter:
Cable comDartment.
the connectors
..7
Page
Adiusting
the transmilter
controls
Animoortantdifference...................................................31
What it does, how
you
set
it up
Memories
and lists
"Transmitter
Control" copy
mode
...............................-....42
"
EXPORT' and
"
IMPORT" copy
mode ...........................42
The
"Mx"
memory
-
the
point
of
no return
.......................42
The
"SHIFT"
menu:
How to switch
models ......................
The
"NAME"
menu:
How to enter
or change a
model name ............................43
The
"TRlM"
menu:
How to check
and correct
the trim sliders
........................44
Mixers
What is
"mixing?"
.............,................45
How to use the
pre-defined
mixers
..................................46
Description of the
pre-defined,
"ready-made"
mixers
......49
Mixers for fixed-wing
models:
"ELEVATOR
+","V-TNV,
"V-TAIL
+",
"CROW',
"sNAp
FLAP".
"QUADRO",'OELTA'
.............................49
Mixers for model
helicoDters:
"
DYNAMIC
THROTTLE',
"FLARE"
..50
The freely detinable
mixers
......50
Activating
the stick
ratchet ..............
Charging
the transmitter
battery
Slow
charging,
rapid-charging
...............7
The
keypad and
the menu system
The
keypad
...............8
The
menu svslem
...............
..................9
Tra nsmitte
r
co
ntrol s a n d switches
...........
Special-purpose
menus
The
"Operations"
or
"Status"
display
...............
..............'12
How to use
the operating
period
timer
.............................13
Changing
transmission
mode
(PPMZ
PPMg,
PCM) .................
Powered
models:
"BIG
LIFT"
"
MIRAGE"
Helicopters:
,
HELIBOY'
"
RANGER"
,
BK-'117"
The assigning
process
Why do
we have to assign?
.................25
How
to assign the transmitter
controls
...........................--25
How to assign servos
......................................................26
Adiusting
the servos
How to
reverse servo rotation
..............28
How to adjust servo
neutral
..................................-..........29
How
to adjust servo
travel ...............................................29
How to
limit
servo
travel
..................................................30
How to
make travel
inputs
switchable
..............................30
.19
"RC1/F3A'
..............20
"TAIL
ROTOR',
"HEIM
HEAD','HEAD
Mlx',
.....65
The
..TRANSMITTER
CONTROL
TEST.. menu
.....66
Äccessories
Stick
tops
................ 67
.....67
Flelocating and
installing switches
....................
Hand supports,
weather shield
............68
For Experts
Switching
memories
"in
flight"
............68
Assigning servos
with more than
2
ailerons
.....................69
The
"Sl"
switch
..................................69
Transferring
programs
between two
transmitters
.............. 70
The FIXED
VALUE virtual transmitter control
...................71
-
Welcome
to
the PROFI
mc 3010
In
purchasing
the
PROFI mc 3010
you
have acquired
a
product
of
the highest
quality,
with
all
the advantages
of
being
"Made
in
Germany".
We thank
you
for
your
faith
In our
company.
As in all top-class
radio control systems
the capabilities
of the
equipment
are concentrated
in the transmitter,
which offers
a tremendous
wealth of
features and
facili-
ties.
The transmitter
also embodies
an entirely
new
method
ol setting
up and controlling
these
features, de-
signed
specifically
to
make these advantages
easier
for
the modeller
to understand
and use.
This
new
philosophy
is based
on three
elements:
"the
device
guides
the user",
by
means of a
"menu
system"
and
"clear,
easily understood
messages".
With
this in
mind,
you
could
be forgiven
for asking
"so
why
do we
need such a
fat manual?"
And indeed,
you
may
tind
such
a
weighty tome
rather frightening.
Well.
tirst ot all. the
PROFI mc 3010
is capable
of much
more than
you
can
imagine
-
and
we
would hate to
hide anything
from
you.
Secondly,
we have
put
a lot ol
eftort
into making
this a manual
that any
modeller can
understand
-
everything
is
explained
in full.
In soite ol
this,
we have to admit
that the
familiar
"
8Ol2O"
rule still applies:
with only
a 20010
knowledge of
the transmitter,
you
will be able exploit
800/0
oJ its facili-
ties. And
you
will soon
find out that
you
only need this
manual for the
odd special case.
Nevertheless,
we
would
ask
you
please
to read
right
through
this book at
least once, and
thoroughly.
Do this,
and
you
can be
sure that
you
know enough
to use the
system sensibly.
You
will
also
acquire some
idea of
the
vast range of
possibilities
which the system opens
up,
even if
you
have no use
for them at
present.
We hope
and trust that
you will have many
years
of
pleasure
and success
with
your
PROFI mc 3010.
PROFI
mc 3010
About
this
manual
lf
you
have some
prior
experience,
and
want
to
"get
down
to it" as
quickly
as
possible,
please
turn
to
the
section
entitled
"Quickstart",
which
precedes
the
main
text
ol the
manual.
The
remainder
of the book
is
divided
into
two
main
The tirst
part:
describes
and
explains
the
transmitter
and
its wide-
ranging
facilities.
This
part
of the
manual
is designed
and
organised
in a
looicä|.
tutorial-slvle
sequence,
so
that
it makes sense
to"read
it right th;ough
while
you
become
familiar
with
the
equipment;
at the same
time
it serves
as
an excel-
lent
reference
source
for later.
lnitiallv
the text
discusses
the
hardware,
then
the
main
screens
which
you
will encounter
on
the LCD
display.
Although
the
menu
system
makes
the transmitter
jusl
about
-perfect
for the
"
DlY
programmer",
a series
of
ready-made
"programs"
(as
they used
to
be called)
is
supplied
as
standard,
and
these
are described
and ex-
plained next.
After
this the
learning
curve
becomes
somewhat
steeper
(don't
worry,
it's not as
bad as
it sounds)
as
we
covdr
thö
transmitter's
facilities
in depth.
First
you
will
learn about
the
procedures and
facilities
which
are
needed
most
frequently.
After that
we deal
with those
which
crop
up
less often,
and some
which
only the
ad-
vanced
modeller
is ever
likely
to use.
Please
don't
think
that
you
have
to
know and
under-
stand
everything
about
the transmitter
right
from
the
start.
lf
you
come
across
something
that
does
not seem
to
apply
to
you,
skip
it for
now, and
read
it later on'
per-
haps
when
you
find that
you
really do
need
it'
lf vou
are an
old
hand at
this sort
of
thing,
please
be
suie
to read
with
particular
care
the Sections
which
are
concerned
with
memories,
switching
memories
"
in
flioht". and
switch.
These
are
the facilities
wfrich.are
not available
with any
other
radio
control
set.
The second
part:
deals
with the
receiving
system:
consisting
basically
of
the
receiver,
the
servos
and the
battery.
As
there are
no
substantial
differences
in this
area
from earlier
radio
systems,
this
part
has been
kept
rather
more briel.
However,
if
you
are
a beginner
to the
world
of model
ra-
dio control
tbchnology,
it is
important
for
you
to
read this
part
very carefully,
absorb
the
information,
and observe
our recommendations
as far
as
possible.
The
manual
includes
an appendix
which
explains
some
of
the technical
terms
which crop
up
most often
in dis-
cussions
of
model aircraft
control
systems.
lf
you
are
a beginner,
the
next suggestion
is aimed
squarely
at
you:
No
matter
how
fat, a single
manual
on
radio control
equipment
can
never
provide
you
with all the
knowl-
edge
you
need
in order
to operate
the
more
complex
anä
dbmanding
models
successtully.
So:
read all
the
magazines
and
books
you
can
get
hold ol
-
there
are
plenty
of them
about.
And
one
more
thing:
please
join
a club,
if at
all
possible.
There
you
will meet
people
with
similar
interests,
who
will be
only
too
pleased
to
pass
on the
benefit
of
their
exoerience.
The
legalside
Nothing
too
onerous
here, but
there
are a
tew
regula-
tions
which
we
have to
heed.
You
must
have a
licence
to operate
a
radio
control
sys-
tem
-
and
in
fact
you
need
a licence
iust
to own
one.
The
PROFI
mc 3010
is a type-approved
system'
so
you
will have
no
problem
obtaining
a
licence.
lf
Vou
intend
operating
the system
in the
40
MHz band'
thä
"General
Licence"
supplied
with
the set
is all
you
need.
Carry
it with
you
when using
the
set, as
it
must be
oroduced
ön demahd
it an
official
of the
Post
Office
de'
mands
to see
it.
You
must
notify
the appropriate
authority
if
you
intend
using
a systeni
in the
35
MHz band.
Please apply
Jor
vour
licence
on the
form supplied
with
the system;
you
irave to
fill out
the
form
with
your
personal
details'
Systems
operating
in the 35
MHz
band
may
only
be
uied
to control
model
aircraft'
lmportant:
Thb
transmitter
may only
be used
with
the
following
RF
modules:
Order
No.4 5668
DBP
licence
No. MF
142183
(27
MHz band)
Order
No.
4
5672
DBP
licence
No.
MFi42/83
(40
MHz band)
Order
No.
4 567|
DBP
licence
No. FE-78y83
(35
MHz
A and
B band).
It is
not legal
to use
the
system
with other
(older) RF
modules.
We strongly
recommend
(although
sadly
it is not obliga'
torv)
thaa
vou
take
out
third'party
insurance
for
your
modets,
oi
add
an appropriate
extension
to
your
per-
sonal
insurance
PolicY.
The operation
oI
working
models
-
especially
of
model
aircraft
-
carries
inherent
risks
which ought
to be cov-
ered.
And even
though
you
may
be comprehensively
in-
sured,
it is still
vital
that
you
operate
your
model
with
safety
in mind
at all
times.
Very
important:
as
in the case
of a
private
car,
your li-
cence
and
your
insurance
are
invalid
if
you
carry
out
modifications
to
your
radio
control
equipment.
The
op-
erating
licence
applies
exclusively
to series-approved
equipment
and any
approved
expansion
units.
For
model aircraft
above
the
legal
weight
limit
it is nec-
essary
to obtain
an
exemption
certificate
before
you fly.
We strongly
recommend
that
you
join
a
model
flying
club.
Many'clubs
are
affilialed
to one
ot the
national
governing
bodies,
and
insurance
is often
an
integral
part
of
membershiP.
Quite
apart
from these
benelits,
a club
can
offer
you
help, answer
your
questions,
and
help
you
to solve
the
myriad
problems which
you
are
bound
to encounter.
After
purchasing
a
new radio control
system
most
modellers
want to see it
in
action
as
quickly
as
possible
-
to
find out
whether it works,
if nothing else.
lf this de-
scription
fits, then this section
is tor
you.
lt
provides
brief
instructions,
with little
in the way of explanation,
on
how
to
get
started
with
your
PROFI
mc
3010.
1.
Charge the
transmitter and
receiver batteries as
de-
scribed
on
pages
7
and
74. lt
you
are
in a real hurry,
and
have access to a
Multiplex automatic
rapid charger,
then
you
can use
that.
2. Connect
the components
of the
receiving system, as
shown
on
page
72.
3.
Check
that the
RF module is
plugged
into the trans-
mitter, and
that the transmitter
crystal
(blue)
is
plugged
into it.
The receiver
must
be
fitted with the
receiver crys-
tal
(same
Channel
No.); for a single superhet
receiver
this
has a
yellow
tag, for a double
superhet
receiver a
clear Dlastic
holder.
4. Switch
on the transmitter.
The LCD display
will now
show
a screen similar
to this:
15
Erli:l li
F F t'1'1
i,
rj5r,.rllllllr.Jrj
:
irt
The top
line shows the
memory No., the
name oJ the
"current"
model
(or
EMPTY), and
the transmission
mode
(PPMZ
PPMg, or PCM) used
for that
model. The
second
line
shows
the transmitter's
operating
voltage;
first in digital
form, then in the
form of a
"bar
graph".
On
the
right
is the operating time.
The top
line ot the display
may not be exactly
as
shown;
this depends on
whether
your
dealer
has
prepared
the
transmitter
for
you
in advance.
5.
As
supplied,
the
transmitter's memories
1
-
5 are
va'
cant;
memories 6
-
15 contain
"ready-made
programs".
The
following
memories are also empty.
lf
your
dealer
has not already done
so
(in
which case
you
only
need to switch on),
you
now have to select
one
ol these
"programs".
Or
-
better
-
copy
one of them
into
one of the
vacant memories.
Then
you
can experi-
ment
with it without
worrying about changing
anything
in the
original,
which may well be extremely
useful
to
you
soon.
To copy
a
"
program",
you
have to do
two things:
a.
lf
you
do
not see memory
No. 01 at top
left in the dis-
play, you
will need to change
to that memory
(i.e.
to 01).
b.
Then
you
will copy one of the
"ready-made
pro-
grams"
into this memory.
This
is how
you
do
it:
6. lf
you
do
not see
memory No. 01 at
top left
in
the dis-
play, you
must
first
switch
to this
memory.
Press keys
E 5lS
in succession.
The transmitter
will
confirm each
key
press
with a bleep.
Your display
will
now look
like this:
SHIFTIHE
FILE
Tu
r 15: Et';1
1i
We will assume
that
it has worked conectly.
Now
press
the
Il
key.
The number
in line 2 starts
to flash.
Now
press
the
E
or
El
key until
the number
01 appears.
lt
should also be
flashing.
Now
press
the
E
key tour times;
you
are
finished, and
will see the
starting display
again, except
that
now
memory
number 01 will be displayed:
ü1
EI{FT'/!
FFI']:-I
i .
SErtJllllllrlrjr
:
ir.J
lf
you
see a
model name after 01,
instead of
EMPTY,
don't worry
-
it's all in order.
7. Now it is time to copy
a
"ready-made
program"
into
this memory.
Depending on
your particular
interests, select
one of
these
three:
"FIESTA'
(glider)
from memory No. 6,
or
"BlG
LIFT"
(powered
model)
from memory
No. 10,
or
"
H ELI-BOY"
(Schlueter-type
helicopter)
from
memory No.
13.
You will now copy one
of these
two models
into
memory No. 1, as
follows:
Press these
keys
in
succession:
EIS Z
. The transmit'
ter
will confirm each
key
press
with
a
bleep.
The screen
should
now look like this:
rf'lü[iE
:
F|]LL
rFF;t'1.
r.J
I
:
El'lFTt,j
!
(Here
again,
it
makes no difference
iJ there is a
model
name after the
No.
01,
instead of
"EMPTY".)
lf the display
is different,
you
have either
forgotten one
of the
keys, or
you
have
pressed
a
wrong key. In this
case
press
the
El
key repeatedly
until
you
arrive
back
at the starting
screen.
Try the
procedure
again.
Press the
!
key.
The number 01
in line 2
(after
"FRM."
=
from) will start to
flash. Now
press
the
E
key
repeat-
edly until
the correct
number appears,
and flashes.
The
display
will show
the conesponding
name after
the
numoer.
You have
now
"told"
the transmitter
what
you
want to
copy.
Press the
@
key. Now nothing
will be flashing, and
line
2 will look either
like this:
rFE:l'1.
rirE,:
FIE5TH
or
rFF:t'l.
i r1: ErI
ril
I FT
tFFIf'I.
1]: HEL
I EIJIJ
That's the
job
done.
Now
press
the
@
key three times,
and
you
are back
where
you
started.
Please
note: the
program
is always copied
into the
current active
memory!
.-..:
8.
You could
meet a slight
problem
at this
stage:
All the
models stored
in memory are
for the
"PPM"
transmission
mode.
lf
you
have
purchased your
PROFI mc 3010
with a PCM
receive(
you
must
now
switch
to the correct
transmis-
sion
mode.
To
do
this,
press
these keys
in
succession
@
Z tr,
and
you
will see this
display:
t'1üt:'ULHT
I
tlti:
FFt,ltr
Press the
Z
key, and
"PPMg"
will tlash.
Now
press
the
El
key, and
"PPMg"
will turn into
"PCM".
Press
the
@
key three times, and
you
will be back
to
the starting
screen.
The
job
is done.
9.
lf
you
now switch
the transmitter off and
on again
(it's
not necessary, but
do it nevertheless),
you
will see that
it has
remembered the
new settings. Unless
and until
you
switch
to a diflerent
model,
you
will always
find the
transmitter set
to this model
and this transmission
mode
when
you
switch on.
Now
you
are
ready to try the system
out.
However,
belore
you
start
worrying about
why the system
is
not
working,
check the
transmission
mode.
This is always
shown
in the
first line of the display,
on the
right.
Three
modes are
possible:
1) PPM 7
=
tor
all
PPM
receivers which cannot
de-
code
9 channels.
lf
you possess
such a
receiver
(e.9.
red 4/6 channel
receiver)
with the transmitter
set to
PPM 9. the
first two servo
output channels
will
not
wof k correctly.
2)
PPM I
=
tor all
PPM receivers,
except those
men-
tioned in
1.
3)
PCM
=
all MULTIPLEX
PCM
receivers.
*
lf the
transmission
mode is not correct,:
see 8.
The next step
is to have a
look at
pages
15 to 24 to
get
an
idea ol all the
things
you
can
do
with the model
(or
program)
that
you
have
selected.
However, betore
you
can
put
the system
to serious use,
you
will need to activate
the throttle
ratchet, and
set up
the transmitter
for throttle-left
or throttle-right,
depend-
ing on
your preference.
See
pages
7 and
14 tor
details.
Keypad
Lift
here
under
flap
Power indicator
Just
to the
right of the ON/OFF
switch
is an
LED which
glows
when the
transmitter
is switched
on. lf the
re-
serve
battery system,
Order
No. 7 5710,
is installed,
the
LED flashes
when the transmitter
is
being
powered
by
the
reserve battery
Charge socket
The Charge
socket
is on the
left face of
the transmitter,
close
to the
top. Naturally
the transmitter
charge
lead
is
plugged
in here;
the socket
is also used
for
the
Teabher/Pupil
lead, for the
Diagnosis
lead, the transJer
lead and the
rev-counter
sensor.
Aerial socket
tension
sctew
This screw
is used
to adjust
the friction
of the swivelling
aerial socket.
Rotate it clockwise
to
increase the
friction,
but
take care
not to overtighten
the
screw as
this might
damage
the swivel.
lf necessary
tighten
the screw
to the
point
where the
(fully
extended)
aerial
just
holds its
posi-
tion reliably.
Make any
adjustments
in
very small steps,
check the
effect, and
adjust again
if
necessary.
Over-tightening
the screw
can damage
the swivel
bear-
Ing.
Slider
control
"markers"
(Fig.
2)
The sliders are
fitted
with a new
form of
marker
-
an ex-
tra slider.
This
is
a
highly
practical
feature, as
it
enables
you
to shift the
slider to a
previously
set
postion
by
feel
älone:
for example,
to a
particular
flap
position.
Simply
squeeze
the slider and
the
marker together
between
thumb
and
forefinger until
they coincide.
Please note:
in each case
the
"outboard"
slider
(the
one
nearest the stick
unit)
is the actual
slider control:
the
"inboard"
ones
are the
markers.
The markers
are
fitted with a
fine
ratchet which can
be disengaged
for
adjustment
purposes.
To do
this
push
the marker slider
outwards
-
towards
the
actual slider
control
-
then
move it to the
correct
position.
Do not force
it
along
the
ratchet
-
the
ratchet
will last
longer if
you
treat
it
gently!
[::'"\'''*'
t\
LI\
|
'-'r
Aerial tension screw
t,
(Switches
and
Digi-Adjustor
not supplied
as standard!)
Transmitter
control
symbols
All of the controls
are designated
by a
letter; for exam-
ole B
is the forward/att
piane
of the
left-hand stick
unit,
and C
is right/left
on the
right-hand stick.
These letters
are
a useful
shorthand
method ol
referring to the con-
trols.
These
letter symbols are
used all
the time
in this
text, and
you
will use them
whenever
you
use
the trans-
mitter.
Stick
unit
trims
(Fig.
3)
Basically
the trims
-
apart
from
the throttle/spoiler
stick
-
work on the
"Centre-Trim"
principle.
This means that
the end-point
values are
unchanged
when the centre
position
of a
stick function
is shifted electronically
(by
moving the associated
trim
lever).
Fig.3
The throttle/sooiler
stick
incorporates
the idle
trim fea-
ture: this
means
that the
trim slider only
works at
one
end of
the stick
arc
(idle);
at
the other
end-point
(full
throttle)
the trim
has no effect.
Please
turn to
page
41
for details
of
how to set up
the idle trim
tacility.
"
Digi"-Adiustor
(not
included
in basic set)
The Digi-Adjustor
has the same
function
as the
El
and
E
keys on the
keypad, and
is automatically
connected
in
parallel
with these
keys, whenever
that serves a uQe-
ful
purpose.
Turning the
knob to the
right by one click-
stop has
the same effect
as
pressing
the
E
key once;
turning
it to the left by one
click
is the same as
pressing
the
E
key once.
This adjustor
has no
"zero"
or centre
point,
and
no end-
points!
Don't worry
-
there
is no
possibility
that
you
might
"overwind"
il. Once
you
reach
the end ot a
par-
ticular
adjustment
range, it ceases
to have any
effect.
When
to use it:
Whenever
you
wish to adjust any
func-
tion
over a considerable
range. However,
its main
pur-
pose
is
for making adjustments
to
the model
when it is
in
flight, e.g. for adjusting
aileron
differential
during test
flying.
The
switch
bays
On
either side
of the LCD screen,
at the
top of the trans'
mitter front face, are
two wells,
each of
which can ac'
cept 6 switches
or similar
accessories.
They
are
num-
bered
1 to
12
as shown
in
Fig. 4.
Switches
with 2 or 3
positions,
long
or
short toggles,
are
available
from
your
dealer.
ilililililtlil|
.
o@o
o@o
@o@
@@@
o,{^
Trim
Ftg
4
Fig. 2
Opening
and closing
the
transmitter
Ghanging
the
RF module
Opening
the case
Hold the transmitter
as shown
in
Fig.
5.
Press the
latch
buttons
down
with
your
thumbs,
then
fold the back
panel
down towards
you.
Always close the
keypad
flap
before opening
the transmitter.
Closing
the case
This is best carried
out as shown
in
Fig. 6. Hold the
transmitter
front as shown.
Engage the
lugs
at
the bot-
tom of the back
panel,
then fold the back
panel
up until
the
latches snap
home.
lf
the
latches do
not immedi-
ately
engage,
press
in slightly at
the sides.
Before closing
the transmitter
always
check that
no
wires
are trapped;
especially around
the stick units
and
over the
well tor the
keypad flap: there
is no clearance
at
all at this
point!
lf
the cables
are organised
logically inside the transmit
ter, there should
be
no danger of
wires becoming
caught
up or
jammed.
Nevertheless
-
always check
one
last time before
closing
the back!
Fig.6
Fig. 5
Changing the
RF module;
changing crystals
Grasp the
module
at
the recessed
points (Fig.
7), then
oull
it
uo and
out of its holder.
The crystal is
plugged
into the side of the
RF module
(Fig.
8). Pull out the crystal by its
plastic
tag.
When
plugging
in a crystal make sure that both
pins
engage
correctly
in
the socket
in
the
module.
Before
plugging
the module in
again,
bend the
plastic
tag over to one side.
When
relitting the module
do
not
press
down
in the
centre
of the
unit,
but
around
the finger recess
position.
This will help to ensure that
it is fitted
squarely,
thereby
avoiding damage to the contacts.
Ftg.7
Transmitter back
panel
lnside
On
both sides there are holders for a spare
pair
of crys-
tals
and
a replacement fuse. Please note the specially
formed
holder for
double superhet
receiver
crystals
and
their correct
position
in
the
holder
(Fig.
9).
Don't lever them out
-
slide them!
Outside
There is a well in the outside of the back
panel
which ac-
commodates
the transmitter aerial Ior transport. The sup-
port
bar can be set
to three ditferent
positions:
folded in
flush, at right-angles to
form
a back support, and upright
as a carrying
handle. Please refer to
Figs. 10
to
12.
\
Fig. 11
Fil.12
lnside the
transmitter
Fuse
Take a
look
at
Fig. 13. The basic
purpose
of
the fuse is
to
protect
the
transmitter against excessive currents
during
rapid charging.
lf the fuse burns out, replace
it
with the same
type
(5
x 21mm,2 Ampere,
quick-actjng
-
standard
commercial item). Charge currents
higher
than
2A may cause damage
to the transmitter electron-
ics!
Cable compartment
The leads from
the various switches are stowed away
inside
the
cable
compartment
(Fig.
14).
To open the compartment
push
one of the spring
latches to one side
and lift the cover off.
Pass the
wires from each connector
into the comparl
ment through the
nearest opening. Lead them out again
through
the openings on the side
nearest the RF
mod-
ule.
Part of the
"excess"
cable length can be accommo-
dated
inside the compartment.
Any spare cable
is best
left at the switch
position.
Always arrange
the wires carefully and
neatly, to
avoid
the cables
forming a mass of unruly
"spaghetti"
around
the stick units
or close to
the keypad cover well.
6
Fig. 13 Fig.
14
The connectors
Three
sides
of the main electronics circuit
board
are
ex-
posed,
each fitted
with
connectors
for the
"peripherals",
i.e.
stick units,
switches and so on. See
Fig. 15.
Starting
from the
lefl,
these are:
DE
Digi-Adjustor. lf
you plug
this
in
the
"wrong"
way round,
the
El
and
E
f
unctions
will be reversed.
MNT MULTINAUT
(module
no longer available)
KnR
Right-hand stick unit.
E
Control
"E".
This is normally
the left-hand slider control.
Fig.
14
F
Control
"F".
This
is normally the
right-hand slider control.
T
Keypad.
Can be
plugged
in either
way round.
G
Control
"G".
Normally this
is
a switched
channel.
Plug it
in the opposile
way round and
the direction of
operation
ol the switched
channel
is reversed.
H, l
Controls
cial
purposes.
Not used
in the standard
version.
KnL
Left-hand
stick unit.
51 to
55
Inputs for the change-over/coupling
switches
51 to 55.
More
on this on
page
12.
US
Teacher/Pupil
switch.
lf
you
install a switch
for
Teacher/Pupil
operation
(the
buddy box system),
it must
be
plugged
in here.
M
Memory switch.
lf a switch
is installed
for
this
purpose,
it must
be
plugged
in here. Plug it
in
the
"wrong"
way
round and
the selected
memories are interchanged.
Note:
When connecting auxiliary
controls and
switches
please
refer to the explanation
of the
"TEST
Controls"
menu on
page
66.
Activating
the stick
ratchet
As supplied, both
vertical axes
of the dual-axis
stick
units
are self-neutralising.
Most modellers
will want to
remove the self-neutralising
action
trom one
stick
(the
"throttle"
stick), and activate
the ratchet
instead.
Removing
the
neutralising spring
Open
the transmitter.
Select
the stick from
which
you
want to
remove the
neutralising spring, and set
it to the
position
shown
in
Fig. 16. Disengage the
neutralising
spring
using
tweezers or
pointed-nose
pliers.
Remove
the spring, and
the neutralising
arm will come
away too.
Keep these
components carefully
-
one day
you
may
need
them again.
The stick
is
now non-neutralising
in one
plane,
but
the
ratchet
is not
yet
active.
Many
pilots
like the throttle
stick
like this; especially
for the collective
pitch/throttle
stick
arrangement
used
with helicopters.
Activating
the
ratchet
At the base
of the stick unit
you
will see
a screwhead
(Fig.
17).
Undo
this screw about
4 complete
turns, coun'
ter-clockwise.
This
releases the
ratchet spring
fitted to
the stick unit,
and activates
the ratchet.
Fig. 16
Fig.17
Charylng
the transm
itter
batt*y
The transmitter
is fitted with a 6-cell sintered-cell
battery
of
1400 mAh capacity,
which
provides
an operating
perF
od of around
five
hours trom a single charge.
The EU-
ROPA-Edition
is {itted with a
1350 mAh battery
giving
about
5
hours' operation.
Note: these
values apply to
perfectly
charged
battery,
measured to lhe
point
where
the
pack
is completely
dis-
charged
(transmiüer no longer working).
Charge
up
your
transmitter
pack
as soon
as the battery
monitor warns
you.
Depending on
your
chosen
method
of charging,
the monitor
will trip after about
tour hours'
operalron.
Slow
charging
The charge current
should be
140 mA. At
140 mA
a
full
charge
is achieved in about
fourteen hours.
At this rate
it does
no harm to continue charging
beyond
this time,
as there
is no danger ol over-charging.
Fig. 18
You can use the earlier
version of the MULTIPLEX Com-
bi-Charger,
Order
No. 14
5540,
to slow-charge the bat-
tery
In this case select the
100 mA
charge
current and
charge
for at least 24
hours. At
this
current
you
can
leave the transmitter connected
to the charger con-
stantly;
it is not
possible
to damage the battery or
the
transmitter
at such a low current.
Be sure
to switch the transmitter off beJore
recharging.
Then connect the transmitter
(charge
socket) to
the
charger
using the charge
lead supplied.
Red
plug
=
+
(positive)
socket on the charger,
blue
plug
=
-
(negative)
socket.
Rapid charging
The transmitter can be
rapid-charged
in
only
1to 2
hours. However,
to
do
this salely
you
must use the
MULTIPLEX
Automatic
Rapid
Charger,
Order
No.
I
2505.
lf
you
use a ditferent
rapid charger, or a difterent
charg-
ing
process,
there
is a
danger
of damaging
the battery
and the transmitter.
We would
not
be able
to repair the
unit under
guarantee
under such circumstances.
lf
you possess
a charger
which is not compatible
with
the
protective
circuitry
of
your
new transmitter,
please
contact our Customer Service
deDartment.
For rapid-charging select an output
current ol 1
-
2 A.
Provided that
you
are using the
recommended charger,
you
do not need to concern
yourself
with the battery's
initial state of charge.
At
the
2 A rate, and
with
a com-
pletely
discharged battery
the charge
period
is about
3/4
hour; in any case the charger
switches itsel{ off
when the battery
is fully
charged.
Caution: the charge
rate must
not
exceed
2 A. At
higher
currents
the transmitter
fuse will
burn out.
Do not be tempted
to install a
higher rated fuse, as
you
risk
damaging
the transmitter.
lf
you
damage
the trans-
mitter by exceeding
the recommended
charge
current, we
will
be unable
to repair
it under
guarantee.
Note:
A
brand
new battery cannot exploit
its full capacity
right
from
the
outset. In fact, it only achieves
full capacity
after a few charge/discharge
cycles
(5
to
10). Please bear
this in
mind when
you
start using the equipment,
as the
full
operating
period
will not be available
at
first.
lf
you
need
full
battery
capacity at once,
we recommend
that
you
charge
the ilansmitter,
leave it switched
on un-
til the
battery is completely
discharged, then
recharge
it fully. Repeat thrs cycle
several times.
The
keypad aN
the
menu
qy$tgfi
The tirst
part
of this Section explains
how the
keypad is
useo.
After this
you
will find a brief
introduction to
how the
"device
guides
the user" through
menus.
The
Section
is
concluded
with a brief
explanation
of the
transmitter's
menu structure.
The
keypad
Fig. 19
These
eight
keys, used
in conjunction
with the
LCD
screen,
give you
complete
access
to all the selection
and adiustment
tunctions.
The keys are
in three
groups,
and
it is easy to
remember
what they do.
Very
briefly,
the keys
have the following
functions:
I
The
El
key
This is the
"Menu"
key. You use
it first
to
move from the
display
into the
"Menu
tree". Within the
menu
tree
the
m
key
is
always used
to conclude
any
proce-
dure,
and to move back
into the
preceding
menu.
Re-
gardless
of where
you
are
in the
menu tree,
you
can
re-
turn
to the Status display
at any time
by
pressing
this
key one or
more times.
The
tr
key
R stands
for Reverse
-
that's all
there
is
to say.
This
key
is
used
to reverse a servo,
or switch something
off
or on. More on
this in the explanation
of the individual
menus.
The
E
and
El
keys
These
keys are also
more or less sellexplanatory
lf
something
is to be
increased or
reduced, then
you
do
it
with these two
keys. You can also
use them to
"leaf
through"
lists of options at
many
places
in the various
menus.
Examples
of using the
E)
and
E
keys:
Adjusting servo
travel
Adjusting a
mixer input value
Switching
to a different
memory
Moving on to the
next transmitter control
when
testing etc.
One
special
teature here: where
it is of
practical
use,
these
keys Jeature an auto-repeat
function.
lf
you
press
the
key briefly,
its
action
occurs once.
lf
you
hold
it
pressed
down, the action
is repeated automatically.
You
simply
need to
press
the key and
watch the display,
then
release
it when the
required value
is reached.
lf
you
"overshoot",
press
the
opposite
key to
go
back
again.
For
instance,
if
you
wish to change a
mixer
input
from 0 to
70, this
is
somewhat
easier
than tapping
the
E
key 70 times.
Whenever
it makes sense,
the Digi-Adiustor
(see
page
5)
is
connected
in
parallel
with these two
keys. You can
then
choose
whether the keys or the
rotary knob
is the
more convenient
to use.
The
IZZN
keys
These
are the
"selector"
or
"afto^ "
keys. The
rec-
tangular
arrangement
is deliberate:
when
you
are
at
a
particular
menu
(wait
a moment
-
we're nearly
there!)
you
will see triangular
symbols, or
selector
tags,
in the display,
which correspond
to these
keys.
They are always
in approximately
the
same
"
cornet"
of
the screen.
It
you
press
one ol these
keys,
you
se-
lect that
point
in the
display
which is
adiacent
to the
corresponding
symbol.
We don't
want
you
to
get
complacent, so
here are
two
(slight)
complications:
1,
lf there are only
two
possible
selections
in a
particu-
lar menu, only
two selector tags are
displayed, and
only
the
corresponding
two keys are
"active".
lf
you
press
one
of the other
keys, nothing
happens.
2. Within any
of the
"Adjustment"
menus the
arrow
keys are also
used to
"release"
or
"activate"
particular
points.
The
"
trce" or
"active"
point
then
starts flashing.
Don't
worry if this is not clear
-
it's all much easier
to
do than
to describe.
A
briet
recap:
Symbol
in the display
=
key with same symbol.
The
key
is
"in
the same corner'r
as the symbol
in the dis-
play.
When
you press
one
ot the
keys,
you
select the
point
in the menu
which is adiacent
to the same
symbol
in the display.
Now
for
a
quick practice
session:
We
assume
here that
you
have copied
"BlG
LIFT" into
memory 01,
as described
in
"Quickstart",
and
that this
is still
the current
memory.)
Switch
the transmitter
on, and
you
will
see
the Status
display.
Press the
E
key. You are
now in the
"root"
menu
-
Menu 1:
r![P;t..t11
rjüHTt:t:tLr
rF
I LE:;
l'lEl.lUfu
Press the
Z
key, and
you
are
at the
"Servo
adjust-
ment"
menu:
rTFjt.J+FtEr.J.
L I l'1 I
Tr
rt::Ef.lTFlE
:;t,J
I Tr-Hr
The
El
key returns
you
to the
root menu 1. Try
pressing
the
Z
key:
you
arrive al
root menu 2:
rFUF'IL
H5:;IIJHI
rLrF .
FEF; I Lrti
Ft_:t'L
Z
key again, and
you
are
at the
Modulation
t'1r:rt:,1_llt-lT
I
r:rl'.1 :
F F
l,1'lr
Press the
menu:
lf
you
press
the
Z
key, PPM9 Jlashes.
As we
have no use
for
this at
the moment,
press
the
E
key repeatedly
until
you
arrive
back at the Status
dis-
play.
You now know
how the selector
keys and the
E)
key work.
We will
get
to the other
keys later.
The
Menu System:
makes choosing easy
In the
"Keypad"
section
which
you
have
just
read,
you
learned
virtually
all there is to
know about
navigating
your
way
from one menu to another.
Now
we
explain
the
principles
behind the system.
ln the world ol
"rcal"
computers the development
of
the
"menu-based
user
interface"
has
been
one of the
most
important steps
in maskirg the stony,
unflinching
face
of the computer,
and making
it
acceptable
and accessF
ble to the
ordinary
mortal.
The basic system
works like this:
The computer
provides
a list ot options
in the form
of a
menu, which shows
everything that
it is ready to
carry out
at any one
moment.
From
the options
on
offer
the user selects
what he wants.
Since
the computer
usually
has a vast array of capabili-
ties,
it is
generally
the case
that the
particular
option
you
want cannot
be selected
in
a single
step. After all,
if
the computer
were lo ofter
just
one, extremely
lengthy
list of oDtions. then
it would be difficult
to see what
was
on offer, and
sort out
what
you
want. lt would be
very
difficult to
make sense of a
restaurant menu
with
50
dif-
terent dishes
on one
page.
Keeping to the
restaurant analogy,
the sensible
restau-
rateur spreads
his menu over
several
pages, grouping
all the
meat dishes
in
one section,
all the
fish in another,
and
so on. lf
you
have a hankering
for a veal cutlet,
you
would look
it
up
like this:
main courses
-
meat
dishes
-
"veal".
A real menu usually
has no contents
page.
lf
what
you
are
looking
Jor is not on
page
1
("Menu
1"),
then
-
assuming
that
it is not something
really
exotic
-
you
might hope to
lind it on
page
2
("Menu
2").
The menu system
of the PROFI
mc 3010
works in a
similar
way.
Take a look at the diagram
on
page
12, which repre-
sents
the options
oftered by the
PROFI mc 3010
in a
slightly simplif
ied form.
In
your
last experiment
you
learned that the
ts
key
takes
you
directly
from the
Status
display
to the menu
proper,
i.e. to
Root Menu 1.
By selecting
SERVO
(top
left)
you
move to the
"Servo
adiustment'f
menu, where
you
can set
up many op-
tions,
if
you
wish.
By selecting CONTROL
(top
right)
you
move to the
"Transmitter
Controls"
menu, where there are
also
several
possible
options
for
you
to choose.
PROFI mc
3O1O
EURO-LINE
menu
structure
Sheet
1
SERVO
Pupil mode ON means:
Trim on the
pupil
transmitter
is not active
Menu 1
MEMORY
Menu 2
Reset operating
period
to 00:00 Select
modulationl
PPM 7
PPM 9
PCM
ASS/GN
BB File number'1 ...30, Fx
F I E5Tll File name, I characters
PFll9 Transmissionmode
l. SBU Battery voltage,
digital
llllll
Battery voltage, bar
graph,
6 blocks
tlB
|
2B Operating
period
in
hours rminutes
CONT ROL
Select servo
and assign
lunction
Select control
and assign
function
Release functions,
to be controlled by the
pupil
Define user mixers:
select USR-MIX 1,2,3
select input INP 1,
2,
3,4
assign function
Automatic
on to
menu
ASSIGN SERVO
Select MEMORY at bottom
left, and
you
find a
menu
which copes
with everything to do with memories.
For the moment, the bottom
right
option
hides every-
thing else
which the transmitter
has
to
offer, via Menu
2. You might
like
to think
of this option as
"more"
or
"contd.".
In Root Menu 2 things continue
in
the same
way:
On the
left
you get
to the
pupil
menu and the operating
10
period
timer; on the righl to
"Assign"
and
"PCM".
Be-
cause
of the similarity to a tree
-
albeit one
growing
up-
sidedown!
-
this type of menu arrangement is otten
known as a
"menu
tree", or
-
more technically, as a
menu structure. Have a look at the diagram above.
You
will
see,
for example, that there are
four more menus
hidden
behind
the
"
Files" menu.
This is intended to show that there are
four
"dead
ends"
which are accessible from the
"Files"
menu; in this
case
they are
"Copy", "Shift"
(switch
models),
"Name"
(enter,
change), and
"Chk.Trim"
(check,
match).
Eh FIE5TFI FPI'I:T
t. 5r:rr.rllllllErEr
:
IEl
r_;EEtJr_r
r-:r:rt.lTF:üLt
rF I LE!; l'lEHUfu
rTHLI+FlEtJ.
LIlllTr
rl:El.lTFiE 5lrllTt-Hr
7L:tlPV
Htll,lEt
r5H I FT
t-:H1"..
TE I l'1.i
!:ET UF'\
rtlül'lEr I
-::trl.
TE!:Tr
TFUFIL
II5!;IEI.]t
rr:F . F'EF:I
tltt
Fl:l'L
--
FLTFIL r4ütiE
--
15
: IJFF
r
--t:tF
ER. FEFr I
t--t['--
F:E5ET: Erlr l€, r
l'1ltI:,LlLET I
t:tl.,l:
FF tl'i..
Tt.UHTFIUL
!;EF:l..lr.lr
rTEFtlH
l-l5F:-l'l
I lir
H!;51rjH SEELJ|| 1
I
I.IILEF:UH r
I
r]rlHTE:lrL5
FIUIIDEE
r +FII
LEE
J+5F'U
I L
.'+FlU[t[tE /'+ELEIJt]
rLt!:F:-l'1I
li 1
i:+T+E:j
rlHF,1! .". /
H:;5I
rif.lr
I Lltr F
tll'p
rFt_tF
I L
LIJF. FEF;
PROFIMC
3O1O
EURO-LINE
Menu
structure
rTEr.r+FELr.
LII'lIT!
rr-:El.lTEE
5til I TtlHr
ELELI.
+
+
1LlE:.:/
7::EF:.
l: ELELT,
+
r:;Fl.t
I L:
l:lt{
/
15EFl.
i:
ELEU.
+
I:EHTEE:
+.
ü:1.I
r!:EE.l:
ELE\.r.
+
r+lBtlil
F+
ELEl..lF/
Adjust
travel and set direction
for:
Switch
mixer
inputs
ON/OFF
and assign
switches
to inputs
@
ntes
rl:ilF'i
HF,tl'lEr
r:;H I FT
t_:H1.,.
TF:l l'1r
F I LE:
EE,I
HFII.IE:
FIE5TF
/
5T I
r::ti
EEFI:IF:
5HIFTlHIJ
FILE
Tlt rr:rh:FIESTH
rl{u[:'E
:
FULL
\FFll'.|,
r:1b:
FIE5TH
Select
copy
mod6:
-
FULL
-
CONTROLS
-
.ERASE!'
.
EXPORT
-
IMPORT
Adjust trim
settangs
Aulomalic on to
menu
TRIM
(adjusl
trim setlings)
Enter
file name
5ET
I]FI
rt_:Ltl'1E
I
-5t'l.
TE5Tr
rII:
ELEIJH
TFIHUELT
H!;Vl'ltlETF;
+
1
FJrili:^r
r
l
rjrJ:,j rl5L,r:
51+
r
F:LITlIIEE
+FI
I LEEI.]H
ITFIL.
LLT|I
-
F F ,-. rr t
LFtlnl
CONT
ROL
Define
Combi-Switch:
-
adjust
inputs
-
assign switch
-
reverse couplrng
The same
applies
to three
of the other branches
of
the
tree.
To avoid confusing
the
main diagrams,
these
"sub-
menus" are
shown
in
detail
on
page
11.
Using
this branching
system
you
can always
reach
your
destination,
i.e.
get
to the
point
where
you
want to adjust
or assign
something,
just
by
pressing
a
tew keys.
The overall
result:
You don't
need to learn any
codes or
conJusing compu-
ter
terminology.
In fact,
you
will
find
that
you
don't even
Set
up controls
-
adjust etfect
-
assign
switch
need the
tree diagram
after a
while, as the
plain
English
texts
guide
you
easily
through the
menus. Our sole
pur-
pose
in explaining
the
principle
is to ensure
that
you
have some
idea of
what
you
are
doing when
you press
the various
keys.
And anyway,
a little understanding
never hurt anyone.
The menu tree
is arranged
in
such
a way that
it is
quick-
er to
get
to the commonly
used
Junctions
than to the
rest.
'11
,
'
This
section
is necessarily somewhat
dry and theoreti-
cal,
and
you
can skip
it for the moment
il
you
wish.
However, sooner or
later
you
will need to absorb
some
of this information,
particularly
when installing auxiliary
switches or
other exDansion units.
As we have already seen on
page
Z
where the
internal
connectors are described,
there are several diflerent
types of connector.
First there are the connectors
which have one
purpose
only: Digi-Adjustor
(DE),
Keypad
ff)
and Memory Switch
(M).
There
is not much to say about these sockets
-
each
unit must be connected
in the correct
place.
Next comes the
group
of
"letter
inputs": A to
l.
These are
connectons for the transmitter
controls.
Here a brief explanation
is necessary: the
inputs A, B,
C, D are
not
shown
individually; they are
grouped
to-
gether
as
"KnU'
(left-hand
stick
=
A, B) and
"KnR"
(right-hand
stick
=
C,
D). The
stick
units must also
be
connected
to the correct sockets
(KnL
and KnR).
The remaining inputs are
marked
51
to S5 and US.
This
is where
"change-over
switches"
and
"coupling
switches"
are connected.
What are
transmitter controls?
Well, in coarse terms, these
are all the
"movable
ele-
ments" on
your
transmitter,
which
you
use
to operate
something on
your
model. They
include the 'wo stick
units,
the sliders, and
also, for example,
the switch
which
you
use to
release the aero-tow mechanism.
So
what are change-over switches
and coupling
switches?
These switches
are usually used
not to actually
move
something
on the model, but,
for example, to
switch be-
tween
different
pre-set
values
(such
as
Dual Rates) or
to
activate
coupled controls
(e.9.
Combi-Switch,
or a
f lap/elevator
coupling switch).
An
"extra"
for the expert:
The switch
"Sl"
is a special-purpose
feature which
does
not fit into our
neat
scheme.
lt
is
a 3-stage
switch,
and
should
really be included as a
"transmitter
control",
as it is connected
to input
"l".
However,
it
can
be used
in a similar
way
to one of the change€ver
or coupling
switches;
especially
in combination
with a transmitter
control.
An explanation
of these
special
features
would only
confuse
matters at this
point.
Please see
page
69
in the
Section
entitled
"
For experts".
Now we come
to
one
further difterence,
and a
possi-
ble source of
confusion.
According
to what we
have
just
said, a switch
can be
ei-
ther a
transmitter control
or a change-over
or coupling
switch,
depending on
where
it is
connected
inside the
transmitter.
But this
is only
partly
true:
Change-over
switches and
coupling
switches
have a
2-core connecting
lead. A switch
with a 3-core
lead can-
not be used
for this
ourpose.
Switches
which act
as transmitter
controls
may have ei-
ther a
2-core or a 3-core
lead.
For a simple ON/OFF
switch
(2-position)
the lead
is 2-core.
For a 3-stage
switch
it must be 3-core.
Why?
When
you plug
in a switch,
the transmitter
control
inpüt
"sees"
whatever
the unit
is
as
a
potentiometer
So
the
input sees a switch
as a crude
pot,
which can only
be set to
its
end-ooint
values.
And one more
note
In line with
what we have
just
said,
it is
perfectly
possi-
ble to connect
switches
(preferably
3-position
switches)
to inouts
E and F
instead of the standard
sliders.
This
can
be a useful
feature for special
models
which
require
many switched
channels.
On the
other hand
inputs G,
H, I can also be
used with
further Dots
instead of switches.
Most users
of the
PROFI mc 3010
will
hardly ever need
these
features. Our
intention
in
presenting
this brieJ ex-
cursion
into the
"
realm of the unused
features" is
just
to
give
you
an
idea of the flexibility
and
versatility of
your
new system.
What this all
means in
practice:
When
you
assign
or adiust
transmitter
controls,
you
will
always
find
yoursell
dealing
with the
"letter"
abbrevia-
tions.
When
you
are
assigning
change-over
switches
or cou'
pling
switches,
you
will be dealing
with 51
to S5 and
L/S.
When f itting auxiliary
switches
you
must bear
in mind
the number
of wires
in the cable.
t.r
rtrl
EITiLIFT
FFI'l'1
i
. ErSrtllllllr:rri
:
trr
The top line:
Ol
=
number
of the
"current"
memory.
This is always
the memory
(or
"list")
which
was in use
last time
you
operated
the system.
This usually
means:
the
model
that
you
last operated.
BIG
LIFT
=
Name of the
model
in English.
That's
easier
than
remembering
a number,
isn't it?
PPM 9
=
Transmitter's current
transmission
mode
(modulation). Also the same
as the
last time
you
used
the set.
The
"Operations"
or
"Status"
display
(Here
again
we will assume that
you
have copied
"BlG
LIFT" into
memory 01, as described
under
"Quickstart"
-
and that
you
have
not switched to a different
memory.
OJ course,
what
we are
going
to
say next applies
to
every
other
model memory.)
When
you
switch
the transmitter
on, the Status
display
will appear
on the LCD screen.
lt
provides
a summary
of the
most
important things
you
need to
know
lor
con-
trolling
your
model:
12
The second
line:
r:r.
i4r.IllIIII
8.24
Y
=
transmitter
battery
vohage. The digital
value
is
very accurate,
but
unfortunately
not
easy
to assimilate
at
first
glance
-
a drawback
of all digital
displays.
lm-
mediately after
a
full
charge
the
voltage
is
about
8.2
-
8.4
V.
At 6.9 Volts
the battery
monitor trips, and
the bat'
tery should
be
recharged.
Next
to the digital
display
is a
"bar"
consisting
of up
to 6
"boxes".
This is an analogue
version
ol the digital
volt
age display;
it
is
easier
to understand
at a
glance,
but
it
isnot
so accurate.
Consider
it as a rough
indicator of bat-
tery
voltage.
The battery
discharges steadily
while
you
are
using
the transmitter,
and at the
same time
the boxes
are
gradually
erased
from right to
left; i.e. the bar
be-
comes
shorter.
Because
of manujacturing
tolerances,
and
lhe
inherently approximate
nature of the bar,
the dis-
play
is not as accurate
and
reliable as the digital
display,
but
it
gives
you
a useful
idea ol how things
are
going.
After the bar
display:
rlrl:2+
A
very useful
leature:
The operating
period
display
At any
time
you
can
see
how long the
transmitter
has
been
in use since
the last
time the timer
was
reset to
zero
(you
can do
that at any
time
-
see
the next section
on this
page
for more details).
The timer
is cumulative,
and it
makes no difference
how
often
you
switch
the transmitter
on and
ofl; the operat-
ing
period
timer
stops counting
when
you
switch
off,
and
continues
when
you
switch
on again.
In
practice
the best
way of
managing the
timer is as
foF
lows: set it to
zero every time
you
recharge
the battery
The display
shows
hours :
minutes.
How to use
the operating
period
timer
There
is not much to say
about this
timer; all
you
can do
to
it is reset
it
to
zero. To do this
(starting
trom the Status
display)
press
E Z
f]
. You will now be at
the operating
oeriod timer
menu:
--ÜFEFI.
FEFI
I LItI--
EE:;ET:
Et:l:
ltit r
Press the
Z
key; the
value displayed
will
change
to
00:00,
and
you
are
done.
Return to
the Status display
with
@ El El
.
The operating
period
display
is in the form
hours :
minutes.
There
is nothing
else to
worry about concerning
this
timer.
When the
transmitter
is switched
off,
it records
the
last displayed
time
and starts
again
from the
re-
corded
value
next time
you
switch
on.
When should
I reset the display?
The timer can
count uo to
99 hours 59
minutes, then
it
starts again
from
zero. That's by
no means
long enough
to measure
the
lifetime of the
transmitter, although
it
might be
enough
for
"occasional
flyers"
to count their
flying time
per
season.
It makes
most sense
to reset
the timer
to zero every
time
you give
the
transmitter battery
a
lull charge.
The
transmitter's
operating
period
lrom a full charge
is
around
four hours, so
the display
gives you
quite
an ac-
curate
idea of
how much
longer
you
can
fly. But
please
only
consider
this value as
a
guide.
Slight
differences
in
batteries
and
in the transmitter's
current
consumption
can
result
in variations of up
to +/-
20010.
Your
best
bet
is to carry out
a
practical
experiment
to determine
how
long
your
own transmitter
actually
lasts.
How
to switch
between
the
transmis-
sion
modes
PPM7, PPM9 and
PCM
The transmitter
can be used
with both
PPM
receivers
(e.9.
"UNl
9") and
with PCM units
(e.9.
'PCM
DS').
You
have to set
the transmission
mode to
match the
type
of
receiver
you
wish to use.
This is
how
you
do
it:
From
the Status
Display
press
EIZZ
to arrive at
the
"PPM/PCM"
display.
You will see
this:
l'lUttLlLHT
I ül'lr
FFI'1fu
Press
the
E
key.
"PPM7", 'PPMg"
(or
"PCM")
will
start
to flash.
Press the
E
key.
PPM will change
to
PCM
(or
vice
versa).
That's all there
is to it. Use
the
E
or
El
key to
change
from PPM
7 to PPM 9 and back.
Press
El
three
times to
get
back
to the Status
Display.
It is only
necessary
to switch to
PPM 7
if
you
wish to
use a
receiver
which cannot
decode 9 channels
(e.9.
4/6 channel
receivers buill
in 1979).
lf
you
attempt to
use
this type
of receiver
with the
transmitter set
to PPM I,
the servos
attached
to outputs
1 + 2
will not work cor-
rectlv
13
("ready
made lists')
In the transmitter's standard
form, memories
No. 6 to
No.
15
contain
"ready
programmed"
model lists
(or pro-
grams).
These example
programs
embrace a
high
per-
centage of the
models which
are actually
flown by
prac-
tising
modellers.
You
can
use any of these example lists
iust
by switching
to the appropriate
memory as described on
page
43.
Before
you
fly
your
model,
you
may
well have to alter
the direction of servo
rotation,
and
that is described on
page
28.
You may like to use these examples as
the starting
point
for
your
own lists.
lf
you
do
not want to change
the
"original",
first copy it into an empty
memory
(as
de-
scribed
on
page
41)
and then
make modifications to the
copy.
The following example
lists are available
as standard:
Memory
No.
6:
"FIESTA'
-
a
typical simple
glider
Memory
No. 7:
"SALTO'
-
a
typical
glider
with
V{ail
and
"flaperons"
Memory No. 8:
'F3B"
-
a
typical FSB class
glider
with
"aileron
brakes"
(Crow
system)
Memory No. 9:
"CORTINI('
-
a typical tailless
glider
Memory No. 10:
"BlG
LIFT'
-
a
typical simple
powered
model
Memory
No. 11:
"RCl/F3A'
-
a typical
powered
aerobatic
model
Memory
No. 12:
"MIRAGE"
-
a typical delta
model
Memory
No. 13:
"
HELI BOY"
-
a typical
helicopter with
"Schlueter"
rotor head
Memory
No. 14:
"
RANGER"
-
a typical helicopter
with
"Heim"
rotor
head
Memory
No. 15:
'8K117'
-
a typical
helicopter with
"120
degree"
rotor
head
-
head
linkage using virtual swashplate
In all the examples
it is
assumed
that the
transmitter
is set up
as tollows:
Rudder
(or
tail rotor) and elevator
(pitch-axis)
on the
right-hand
stick.
Throttle
(or
spoilers or collective
pitch)
and aileron
(or
roll)
on the
left-hand
stick.
lf
you
use a
ditterent transminer
mode,
here are briet
in-
structions
on how to change
the settings:
14
Interchanging aileron
(roll)
and
rudder
(tail
rotor):
1. Select the
ASSIGN CONTROLS
menu
From the
Status
Display
press
@ Z N Z
.
r
fi
r::r:rl.lTF:t:tl::
L FII LEE:I:II..I
resp. P I TrlH-FN
I5
resp. P I TrlH-HH
I5
or 5PU I Lt t{
resp.
rl0LL.
P I
TllH
pressing
@
four
Note: if
you
last
worked
on a
different transmitter con-
trol,
you
must first select Control
A. To do this
press
the
Z
key then
El
or
E
until
A
appears
in the display.
2. Assign control
A to the rudder
(or
tail
rotor), as fol-
lows:
oress ! EIE
. Result:
r
H
t_:ilt,lTF;uL:;
r FiUtitiEFi
resp.
TF I LRÜT
3.
Assign
control
C to the ailerons
(or
roll), as
follows:
oress Z E E,
then
SIEIE
. Result:
r
t:: t::t:tl..lTFtt_tLl
L FII LEF:LIH
resp. R|ILL
4. Return to the Status
Display:
press
E E] E E]
. That's
it finished.
Interchanging throttle/spoiler
(collective
pitch)
and
elevator
(pitch-axis):
1.
Move to the
"ASSIGN
CONTROLS"
menu with
EIZNZ,
as described
above.
r
E
t::üt..lTFlr.rL:,
t
ELEI.JI]TÜFJ
Note:
il
you
last worked
on a different transmitter
con-
trol,
you
must first select Control
B.
To
do
this
press
the
Z
key then
E
or
E
until B appears
in the display.
2. Assign control
B
to
the elevator
(pitch-axis),
as
lol-
lows:
press
!,
and
then
E
or
E
repeatedly until
ELEV
(or
PITCH-AXIS) appears.
Result:
r
E [ÜHTRÜ15
t
ELEUIlTÜE
3.
Assign control
D to throttle/spoiler
(collective
pitch),
as follows:
press
Z,
then
SIEE,
then
El
or
E
until
THROT/SPOIL
(or
COLL.
PITCH) appears.
Result:
r
ti
rlüt.tTFiü15
I THEITTLE
4. Return to the Status
Display by
times.
resp. R0LL
The
procedure
lor assigning
the transmiüer controls
is
described
in detail on
page
25.
Example:
"FIESTA"
The
"FIESTA'
is
an
example of a
simple model
glider.
The ailerons are
controlled by
a single servo
(mechani-
cal differential).
The
airbrakes
are operated
with the
left-hand stick.
"Combi-Switch"
supported.
An aero-tow
coupling,
or
radio-controlled
towhook, if
fitted, is oper-
Memory No.: 6
ated by
a switched channel.
A
mixer is featured to
pro-
vide
pitch
trim compensation
when airbrakes are
ex-
tended.
However, the mixing
input
is
set
to zero as
standard,
and the user
has to set the
value if he needs
the
feature.
Summary:
Channel
A B
C
D
E
F G
controls
Aileron Spoiler
Rudder
i
Elevator
Aero-tow
Servo
No
Function
1st
inp.
I
AILERON
SPOILER
RUDDER
TOWHOOK
2nd inp.
SPOILER
Note: the
"FLAP"
input of the
"ELEVATOR"
mixer must be set to
0;
the
"SPOILER"
input can be set
to any value by the
user.
Switches:
55
=
Combi-Switch
Adiustments:
Combi-Switch:
Aileron
--
rudder, following rate
1000/0.
All servos: travel
1000/0,
centre
00/0.
Possible
moditications: Combi-Switch
rudder
-
aileron, switched
off
Airbrake ooeration
via
slider
instead of stick
Example:
"SALTO"
The
"Salto"
is an example
of a model
with a V{ail.
At
the
inboard end of each
wing are
2 rotating trailing edge
spoilers,
which are used to
lose height and
to control
the
landing
approach.
The ailerons are
operated by two
servos,
with
"electronic"
differential.
They are also set
up as
"flaperons",
i.e. they can be
moved in the same
direction
to act as
camber-changing
f laps. As
flaperons
Memory No.:
7
which do
not reach to
the wing
root have
inherent
aero-
dynamic
disadvantages,
the
"flap
input" should be
kept
small,
and they
should only be
used
for aerobatics to
improve
manoeuvrability.
For this
reason the flap
input
can be switched
off by
means of
the switch 53.
The
flaps and the spoilers
are mixed
with the elevator,
to
Drovide
automatic
pitch
trim compensation.
Summary:
Channel
controls
Aileron
Spoiler
Elevator
Aero-tow
l
Servo
No
Function
Flaperon
Vtail
Spoiler
Flaperon
Towhook
FLAPERON
V-TAIL+
V-TAIL+
FLAPERON
1st inp.
AILERON
SPOILER
AILERON
TOWHOOK
I
zr.ro
rp.
f
sro
rp
f
lthi'p'
Switches:
S1, 52
for
Dual Rates
on AILERON,
ELEVATOR;
53 switches
the tlap input
to the ailerons
Note:
when
adjusting
the
mixing inputs
it can
be very useJul
to switch
off any
mixing
inputs
which are not needed
for the
moment
Possible
modifications:
Control
of the
FLAP input
via stick
instead
of slider
Use
of Combi-Switch
(controlled
via 55).
to
FLAP
Example
model:
'FgB"
The
picture
shows a typical
F3B class
competition
mod-
el.
The control system
is
quite
complex.
Each aileron
and
each
flap is operated by
its own servo.
This makes
"Quadro"
and
"aileron
brake"
(crow)
control systems
possible.
In
normal tlight the ailerons
support the
cam-
ber-changing
flaps, and
vice versa; for
landing the
flaps are def
lected f ully down
and the ailerons
Jully up
Memory
No.: I
("aileron
brake"
function).
Elevator compensation
is
mixed in with the
camber-changing
flap
movement and
the aileron
brake system
to compensate
for
pitch
trim
changes.
Flap
movement can be
mixed in to support
eF
evator
movement.
A radio-controlled
towhook
(towhook
and
aero{ow
release treated as
the same
for control
purposes)
is
an
optional addition.
Summary:
Channel
Spoiler
Elevator
Aero-tow
R.
flap
CROW
AILERON
SPOILER
Servo
No
Function
L. ail.
L. flap
Elev
Rudder
CROW
CROW
CROW
ELEV+
1st inp.
nrr-enoru
I nrLenor.r
AILERON ELEVATOR
RUDDER
2nd
inp.
FLAP
3rd
inp. SPOILER
SPOILER
SPOILER
SPOILER
4th inp.
ELEVATOR ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR
Note:
when adjusting the
mixing inputs
it can be
very
useful
to switch off any
inputs
which are
not needed
tor the moment
Possible
modifications:
Control
of the FLAP
input via stick
instead of slider
Flap control with one
servo only;
in this case they cannot support
the aileron
function.
r7z
FLAP
FLAP
17
Example
model:
"CORTINA"
"Cortina"
is a typical example
of a modern tailless
glider.
Control
is
achieved
with two control surfaces
per
wing
panel,
each surtace working as combined elevator
and
aileron
(elevons).
This
arrangement
makes it
possible
to
achieve
tavourable lift distribution in all flight situations.
Memory
No.:
9
The mixing ratios for elevator and aileron
are different for
the inboard and outboard elevons.
A
seoarate
servo is re-
quired
for
each elevon.
Airbrakes are included
for height
dumping and
landing approach control.
The
aerotow
coupling
is actuated via a switched channel.
Summary:
Channel
A B c
D
E
F G
controls
Aileron Spoiler
Elevator
Aero-tow
Servo
No 1
2 3
4
5 6
Function
Elev. R, out Elevon
L, oul Elevon R,
in Elevon L, in Spoiler
Aero-tow
Mixer
DELTA DELTA
DELTA
DELTA
1st inp. AILERON
AILERON
AILERON AILERON SPOILER
TOWHOOK
2nd inp.
ELEVATORELEVA'TOR
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR
Possible modifications:
Control of airbrakes
via slider
instead of stick. Use
oJ a lreely definable
mixer instead of
the
"
DELTA' mixer.
Defined
inputs then:
AILERON, ELEVATOR, SPOILER.
This arrangement
would allow automatic
elevator compensation
tor
pitch
trim changes
caused bv airbrakes.
18
Example
model:
"BlG
LIFT"
The
"Big
Litt"
represents
a simple
powered
model.
Ailerons
and
landing
flaps are
titted
in addition
to the
Memory
No. 10
standard
controls.
An aero-tow
release
can be
operated
via the switched
channel.
Summary:
1
2
3
5
6
AILERON
THROTTLE
RUDDER
]ELEVATOR
FLAP
AERO.TOW
-------_
ss-
Combi-Sw
Adiustments:
Transmitter
control
option:
Dual
Rate on aileron,
elevator,
rudder:600/o
-
Transmitter
control
option: throttle
idle
trim:
-30o/o
Transmitter control
option:
flap travel:
Oo/o,10oo/o
Combi-Switch:
Aileron
---
rudder,
following rate
1000/0
All servos:
travel
1000/0, centre
00/0
Possible
modifications:
Combi-Switch
rudder
-
aileron,
or switched
ofl
19
Example
model:
"RC1/F34"
Examole of an
F3A class comoetition
model. The
ailerons
are each controlled by a separate aileron,
to aF
low the optimum degree
of
differential
to be set.
Two
Memory No.: 11
spoilers are
fitted,
acting
as airbrakes.
Mixture
control
in
addition
to throttle control. A further servo can
be titted
to retract the undercarriage
via the switched channel.
Summary:
Channel
controls
Throttle
Spoiler Undercarr.
Servo
No
Function
L. AIL.
RUDDER
ROTTLE
R. AIL. MIXTURE
UNDERC
Posible
modifications:
Exponential
servo travel
instead of
Dual Rates.
lf
"snapjlaps"
are
titted
instead oJ spoilers, use
of
"SNAPFLAP"
mixer.
20
Example
model :
"
MIRAGE"
The
"Mirage"
is a simple
delta
model.
lt is controlled
via combined
ailerons/elevators
(elevons),
plus
rudder
and throttle.
Memory:
No.: 12
The undercarriage
can be
retracted
via
the switched
channel.
The elevons are
controlled
with
the help of
a
LrtsLtA mtxer.
Summary:
rD
Channel
controls
Throttle
ry9q91
Elgy"to,
Undercarr.
Servo
No
Function
L
elevon
RUDDER
THROTTLE
UNDERC,
Mixer
DELTA
DELTA
'lst
inp.
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR
RUDDER
THROTTLE
2nd
inp.
AILERON
AILERON
Switches:
51
=
Dual Rates, aileron;
52
=
Dual Rates, elevator
Adiustments:
Mixing input
ELEVATOR:
400/0
(recommended
starting
point)
'
Mixing input
AILERON: 600/o
(recommended
starting
point)
Throttle idle trim:
-300/0
DUAI RATCS
ELEVATOR,
AILERON: 600/O
All servos: travel
1000/0, centre
00/0
21
Example
model:
"HELI
BOY"
Example
of a
"simple"
model
helicopter,
with swash-
plate
having
no axial
movement. Collective
pitch,
pitch-axis
and roll-axis
are controlled
by one servo
each.
FLARE
mixer used
lot
"
flarc" compensation.
Simple
"THROTTLE"
assignment
used
tor throttle
in-
Memory
No.: 13
stead
of
"DYN.THR.".
This,
of course,
is
just
a starting
ooint.
Gyro
assumed
is a
"suppressible"
type.
You can switch
between
minimum and
maximum
gyro
effect using
switched channel
G.
Summary:
controls
Throttle
I
Mixture
Gyro
Servo
No
1
2 3
4
c 6
7
Function
Roll
Pitch
Yaw THROTTLE
Collect.
Gyro
Mixture
Mixer
FLARE
TAIL ROT
1st inp.
ROLL
PITCH
YAW
THROTTLE
2nd inp.
coLLECr.
coLLECt.
Switches:
51
-
Dual Rates,
roll; 52
Dual Rates,
pitch-axis;
55
-
direct
throttle
Notes:
only
the end-points
of switched
channel
G are
used; the
centre
position
is
skipped.
3-point
throttle
curve
used.
Possible
modifications:
"DYN.THR."
mixer
instead of
THROTTLE
5-Doint
throttle
curve
"
FLARE"
mixer
nol
used,
only
PITCH-axis
on
pitch'axis
servo
Gyro
not used
(different
type
ol
gyro)
Example
model:
"RANGER"
Example
of a
helicopter
with the
"Heim"
swashplate
ac-
tuation
system.
The
swashplate
is actuated
by two
roll/collective
pitch
servos, and
the
"HElMHEAD"
mixer
is
used.
A separate
servo
provides
pitch-axis
control.
In
this example
"DYNTHR."
is used.
Summary:
Memory
No.: 14
A
"suppressible"
gyro
is assumed,
which
can be
switched
between
maximum and
minimum
effect by
means
of switched
control
H.
"Flare"
mixing is not
re-
ouired,
as
"Heim"
mechanics
cater
for this
mechani-
ca v
71
7)ffi
\_il--'
Channel
AB
controls
Roll
]]i]]xollecl
Throttle
Mixture
Servo
No
Function
Roll/col
Yaw
Throttle
Roll/col
HEIMHEAD
TAIL ROT
1st inp.
ROLL
PITCH
YAW
2nd
inp.
coLLEgr.
3rd
inp.
YAW
Switches:
31
-
Dual Rates,
roll; 52
-
Dual
Rates,
pitch-axis;
55
-
direct
throttle
Notes: Switch
control
H must be
installed
(On/Off
switch, 3-core
lead)
s-ooint
throttle curve
used
Possible
moditications:
3-point
throttle curve
Gyro
not used
(different
type of
gyro)
HEIMHEAD
Mixture
GYRO
MIXTURE
Gyro
ROLL
DYN
THR
THROTTLE
2.7
Example
model:
'B,K117"
ExamDle of a
helicoDter with
"CPM"
swashplate
control
system.
The
swashplate
is controlled directly
by 3 ser-
vos, arranged
at
120
degrees
to each other,
which
pro-
vide collective
pitch, pitch-axis
and
roll-axis
control.
Three servos
are used,
in
conjunction
with the
"HEAD-MlX"
mixer. The throttle
is assigned to
Note:
Phase affects all rotor
head
servos
equally. Before
you
change the Geometry settings,
be sure to set up the collec-
tive
pitch
inDuts and check
that thev are correct,
Summary:
Memory No.: 15
"THROTTLE"
('DYNIHR.'is
an
alternative).
A
"sup-
pressible" gyro
is
assumed,
which can be switched
be-
tween minimum
and maximum effect
by means of
switched control
H.
"Flare"
mixing can be achieved by
unequal
collective
pitch
inputs to the
"centre"
and
"out-
board"
servos.
Channel
controls
Throttle
Servo
No
Function
Ro/Co/Pi Ro/Co/Pi
Ro/Co/Pi
Throttle
HEAD-MIX
HEAD-MIX
HEAD-MIX
1st inp.
ROLL
ROLL
PITCH
THROTTLE
YAW
2nd
inp.
PITCH
PITCH COLLECT.
coLLEgr.
3rd
inp.
coLLECr.
coLLEgr.
4f5I
Yaw
Gyro
Mixture
TAIL ROT
GYRO
MIXTURE
r 4th input: Geometry
sth
input:
Phase
Switches:
51
-
Dual Rates,
roll; 52
-
Dual Rates
pitch;
53
-
auto-rotation;
55
-
direct
throttle
Notes:
Switch
control
H must be fitted
(On/Off
switch,
3-core
lead)
3-Doint
throttle
curve used.
Piich
input value
for
"centre
servo"
twice as
great
as for
"outboard
servos"
(assuming
120 degree
arrangement)
Collective
pitch
input same
for all three servos
Possible
modif
ications: s-point
throttle
curve
Gyro
not used
(different
type
of
gyro)
24
i:
i,:
Assigning
or
linking up, the
transmitter
controls,
control
f unctions
and
servos
is the first and
most
important
part
ot the
setting up
process
which has to
be carried
out
belore
you
can
actually use
the equipment
to control
a
new model.
But don't
run and
hide
-
there's
nothing
very complicated
waiting for
you.
li
you
have owned
another
radio control system
beJore
the
"PROFI
mc 3010",
you
have
probably
already
car
ried
out this
"assigning"
process
without realising
it.
lf,
for example,
you
have changed
switches
round,
or
swapped
connectors
over,
in order to set
up
"aileron
right" and
"elevator
|eft", then
you
have already
"as-
signed"
those
Junctions to sult
your
preference.
We can difterentiate
between
two torms of
assign-
ing:
1.
Assigning
the transmitter
controls
to the control
functions
The examDle
we
mentioned above
falls into
this cat-
egory
Another example
would be
to decide
that the
left-
hand
slider
is to control the
model's airbrakes.
2.
Assigning the
servos to
the control
functions
For
example,
this might
mean that servo
No. 2
(the
ser-
vo connected
to receiver
output
2) is to operate
the el-
evator:
or
in a helicopter
that servos
1, 2 and 3
control a
swashplate
with
a
12o-degree
actuation system.
On
earlier
radio control
systems
this
"total
adjustment"
facility
was
not
provided,
and
in fact
it is not absolutely
essential.
But
you
will soon
see
that it
is highly
practical
and
useful.
The assigning
procedure
can also be
extended
to cope
with the
"miiing"
ot control
functions; but
we don't
want to cover
this
point
here.
lt is discussed
in full
on
page
45, under
the title
"Mixers".
Why do
we have to
assign anything?
This
question
is not all that
easy to answer
simply;
nev-
ertheless
we
will try. Here
are some
of the
reasons:
1. Many
of the transmitter's
functions are carried
out
by
a comDuter
and
its
related software.
The software
is
much more
likely to
work in a sensible
way
if it is
given
soecific
information.
For example,
"elevator"
instead
of
"left
stick. uo/down".
2. Terms such
as
"left
aileron"
or
"right
collective"
are
familiar
to any
modeller. lf
you
"tell"
the
transmitter,
when
assigning
the servos,
that servo
No. 3 is the
"coF
lective
pitch"
servo,
you
can be
certain that
the collec-
tive
pitch
signal
will always be
available
at socket
3 on
the receiver, and
that all
mixing arrangements
which
in-
volve that
channel
will automatically
be carried
out cor-
rectly.
lt
prevents you
having
to worry about
details
which can be
difficult to
sort out.
ln short:
Assigning draws
a clear
line to
follow: for
you
and
for the computer
in
your
transmitter.
How to assign
the
transmitter
controls
From
the Status
Display,
move to the
"Assign"
menu
using
the
key sequence
@ZN.
We assume
again that
"BlG
LIFT"
is
still
the model
in the current
memory
01.
The
display
will look
like this:
rt_:t:ttlTFjUL
L:EE
l"lt:tr
rTElll.H
U5Fi-l'll
iir
Bv
now this
much should be
obvious:
in this
line of the
m-enu
you
select
the transmitter
control.
In our example,
leave the
"A"
showing
(flashing)
and
press
the
S
key.
The
function which appears
after
the
letter now starts
to
flash
(in
our example
"AlLER"),
Now things do
get
a little
more difficult.
lf
vou
press
the
E
(or
E)
key to
leaf through
the func-
tions,
ihe transmitter
will offer
you
the following
Junc-
tions
in
turn:
Select
"CONTROr
(transmitter
control) by
the
Z
key. This
is what
you
will see:
r
t:l
t_:Ltt..lTF:uL5
r tl I
LEF:r:ttl
The transmitter
responds by showing
one
oJ the
nine
controls
(A
to
l) in the display.
Press the
Z
key.
The let-
ter
starts to
flash.
Now
press
the
El
key repeatedly
until
control
"A'
appears.
Try using the
E
key as
well.
A
-
D are
the symbols
for the
stick units.
The letters
are
also
printed
on the
transmitter
casing.
For example, C
is
the
right-left
movement ot the
right-hand stick
unit.
E and
F
are
the two
sliders; these
letters
are also
printed
on the transmitter
casing.
G
is normally
(as
standard)
the
"switched
channel"
No.
7.
H
-
|
are
not available
on
the standard
transmitter.
lf
you
need these
channels,
you
can
install extra switches
and
connect
them to the
main circuit
board sockets
marked
with those
letters.
See
Page
Z
As
you
see,
these
include all the
most commonly
used functions:
Columns
1 and
2 for fixed
wing and
helicopters;
Column 3
Jor model boats
and electric-powered
models
(including
electric-powered
aircraft).
Column
4 is
for the
'extra-special
functions"
1- 5.
"AUX.
1
-
AUX.4"
are used
when no other
term
"fits".
Wewill explain
",/,"
-
the
last option
-
very soon!
pressing
AlLERon
ELEVator
RUDDeT
THROTtIe
2THR
(tor
z ens.)
SPOlLer
FLAP
RETRAct
]iOWHOok
MlXTUre
ROLL-axis
PITCH-axis
YAW-axis
COLL.
PITCH
GYRO
SHIPRUDeT
MOTOR
(etectric)
MOT.2
(etectric)
AUX.
AUX.
AUX.
1
o
4
25
We have
"pre-defined"
these
functions
for
you
so that
you
don't have to type
anything in; all
you
have to
do
is
select the right option. There is
also another reason: if
you
select the terms from the list
above,
your
"intelli-
gent"
transmitter works out what
you
are
likely
to ask
next, and
prepares
itself
accordingly.
The
best way of coming to terms with
this
procedure
is to carry
out a sample assigning
exercise.
We will assume
a
model
glider
with
elevator,
rudder,
ailerons and spoilers.
The right-hand
stick is to control
elevator and aileron;
the left-hand
stick the rudder. The
spoilers are to be oo-
erated
with
the right-hand
slider.
It is obvious
that the forward/back movement
of the left-
hand stick, the left-hand
slider and the
switch
"No.
7"
are not
going
to
be used.
Now we can
get going
-
provided
that
you
are still at
the
"ASSIGN
CONTROLS" menu.
First
the elevator:
Key
Z;
leaf through with the
El
and
El
keys until D ap-
pears
(right-hand
stick, forward/back).
Ohe
line
under this
the display already shows ELEV,
so
there is nothing
to be changed here)
Now the ailerons:
Key
Z;
leaf through again
using
E)
and
E
until G ap-
pears (right-hand
stick,
left/right).
Key
N;
leaf through
until AILER appears.
Now
the
rudder:
Key
Z;
leaf through
until
A
appears
(left-hand
stick,
left/right).
Key
!;
leal through
until RUDD appears.
Finally the spoilers:
Key
Z;
leaf through until F
appears
(right-hand
slider).
PS.: if
you
wish,
you
can asslgn the stick func-
tion B to the spoilers instead
of
the
slider
Key
Sl;
leal
through until SPOIL appears.
That's
almost all there is to it. But what of the
unused
controls
(8,
E, G, H,
D?
There is
a danger here that something has
already been
assigned to these controls when the memory was last in
use
-
something
which
could cause
problems.
At the
very least
it would offend
the sensitive
glider guider
to
see
THROTTLE
against B, for
example.
You've
guessed
it: this is where
"
,
".
"
comes in. As described
above, se-
lect the
controls B, E, G, H, and I in turn,
and assign
them to
",..'.",
unless that has already
been done.
This is typical of
the
way
computers have to
be
treated:
even when they are
supposed to do nothing at
all,
you
have
to tell them expressly, otherwise
they might do
something
unexpected!
The tidy-minded modeller
should always assign
unused
transmitter controls to
z
.
...
/',
€VOn
when it
appears to
be unnecessary. lt is
always
worth
doing, as it can avoid
considerable conf
usion.
Now
you
really are finished,
and can
leave
the menu
with
the
@
key.'
Incidentally:
In the
example above we deliberately chose a
complex
sequence for the assigning
process; you
will
soon find
out
just
how
quickly
this can all be
done.
And
one
more
thing:
You might
have the bright idea
of assigning two
transmitter
controls to the same function,
e.g.
"A
-
Aileron"
and
"C
=
Aileron". In that case the
compu-
ter would not know which instruction it
was sup-
posed
to act upon, For this reason
our
programmer
has instrubted it to
consider the
"last
one" as the
valid
entry. In our
example
it would ignore
the
tirst
entry
"A
=
Aileron",
and accept
"C
=
Aileron".
.
lf
you
want
to,
you
can skip a few
pages
at this
point
and do the fol-
rowrng:
1.
Copy the results of
your
work into memory No.02;see
page
41.
2.
Switch
memories; to No.
02. See
page
43.
3. Enter the name
"FLAMINGO";
see
page
43.
In
the
following
examples we assume that
you
have done all this.
How to assign the servos
By
"assigning
the servos" we mean inJorming the
transmitter
which tunctions
are to be carried out bv
which servo, i.e.
you
determine
the
servo
functions.
To make it
quite
clear which servo we mean, each servo
is designated with the number of the receiver output
socket to which it is connected:
B
1ls
z
Receiver
3
5
6
7
The servo connected
to receiver outDut No. 1 is there-
fore servo No.
1,
that connected to output 2
is
servo No.
2, and so
on.
At this
point you
have a more or less unrestricted choice
of which
number
controls
which function. However, we
strongly
recommend
that
you
adopt a
"standard"
se-
zo
quence,
as
this makes
the
whole
business of setting up
a new model easier to understand.
Our
suggestion
(adopted
from the
"
ROYAL mc"):
Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Throttle
Aileron 2
(if
separate aileron
servos
are used)
Servo
No.
6
-
I :
auxiliary
functions
In
special cases
(e.9.
wings
with multiple
control sur-
faces)
you
will need to
arrange
things
difterently; but
more of that later.
Now the
preamble
is
over,
we
can
get
down to business.
In the displays which follow we assume that
you
have
moved
to
memory
"02
FLAMINGO", as described
aDove.
Starting
from the
Status display,
press
@ZNtr
to
reach the
"ASSIGN
SERVOS" menu. You will see this:
t155I
riH
5EFiLrü i
1
TrJ llILEFiut'l r
Servo
No. 1
Servo
No. 2
Servo
No.
3
Servo
No. 4
Servo No. 5
Servo No. 1
Servo No. 2
Servo No. 3
Servo
No. 4
Servo No. 5
Servo No. 6
Servo No. 7
Press the
N
key.
The
"1"
starts to
flash. Move
on, or
"leaf
through",
by
pressing
the
E
or
E
keys. The
num-
bers
rise
to 9, then start
again
from 1.
As an
example, stop
at
No.
3
("3"
flashing),
and
press
the
Z
key.
The
"3"
will stop
flashing, and
the servo function
in the
bottom
line
will llash instead.
Here
again
you
can
leaf
through
the options
with the
E
and
El
keys and assign
the correct
function to that servo.
lf
you
leaf
through
again
with the
E
key, the transmitter
will offer
you
a
large number of
further functions
in se-
quence.
The series
runs as
follows:
AILERON
ELEV(aro0
RUDDER
THROTTLE
2.THBOI
SPOILER
FLAP
B ETRAT.
TOWHOOK
MIXTURE
ROLL
PITCH
YAW
(tail
rot)
COLL. PITCH
GYRO
SHIPRUDeT
MOrOR
(electric)
2.MOT
(electric)
AUX. 1
AUX. 2
AUX 3
AUX.
4
FIXEO VALU
ELEV +
V
.
TAIL
V-TAIL
+
FLAPERON
AIL.BR.
SNAPFLAP
QUADRO
DELTA
TAILROT.
HEIM
-
IVIIX
FLARE
HEAD
-
IVIIX
DYN. THR.
USR
.
MIX1
USB
-
MIX2
USB
-
MIX3
That's
quite
a
lot to assimilate
in one
go.
Let's take
a
closer
look:
The
"first
division"
includes
the familiar standard
con-
trol
tunctions
lor fixed-wing aircraft
and helicopters,
as
in the transmitter
control assigning
process.
They are
followed by
the specialised
functions
for model boats
and electric-powered
models. As
you
have
guessed,
AUX.1
-
AUX.4 are
for special
functions
which
do
not fit
into the usual
pattern.
Now
to the second
group
Here
we meet
with
the
"mixers",
which
you
have
prob-
ably been
looking
for in vain In this book
so far.
All the
mixers
listed
here are stored
in the transmitter
in
"ready-made"
torm, and
just
need to be invoked,
or
called
up.
More
on this
in
the
section.
Using our exam-
ple,
we will
just
explain
why the mixers are
included
in
the
"Assigning
servos"
process.
Let's
look at the ex-
ample
of a'V-TAIU'.
As
you
probably
know
the two con-
trol surfaces
are
each operated
by one servo,
and thus
both
servos are
"V-tail
servos".
lt
you
now assign the
servos
like this:
Servo
No. 2 controls:
V-TAIL;
Servo
No. 3 controls:
V-TAIL,
then
the transmitter
automatically
understands
that it
must send
the elevator
and
rudder signals to servos
2
and 3.
All
you
need to do after
that is tell
it how much of
each
signal to send.
You have
assigned servos
2 and 3 as
the
"V'tail"
"
mixed
control
f
unction".
Right at the
end of the
list, as in the earliel
assignment
table,
you
will see
"
.
.'.
"
again
-
an apparently
useless
oplion.
A servo
which does
"nothing"
could
really be
left in the
shop
window
-
that's one
way to save
money.
However,
you
will see later that
there is a
good
reason
for
it, and that
the
"
.
.',
"
option
can be
very
useful.
And one
more tip:
l{
you
connect
a servo to a
receiver output
to which
"
.
".
"
is
assigned,
then
the servo
receives an accurate
neutral
position
signal
(and
nothing else).
You can use
this to
set the servo
itself to
its exact mechanical
centre
ooint.
But back
to the more
"normal"
functions.
Don't be afraid
of assigning
one control
function several
times;
the transmitter
knows all
about that.
For example,
let's
discuss
"electronically
differential"
ailerons,
with
2
aileron
servos:
as
you
need two servos
for this,
you
as-
sign them as
follows:
Servo
No. 1 controls:
AILERON;
Servo
No. 5 controls:
AILERON.
This ensures that
both servos
will receive
the aileron
signal.
More on setting
up aileron
differential
in the Sec'
tion entitled
"Transmitter
control adjustment".
Let's imagine that
you
have a
model
with 4 ailerons,
each
of which
you
wish to be
adjustable
separately
Jor
travel and
differential.
You would
then need
4
aileron
servos.
You could
assign all
four servos to
the
"Aileron"
control
lunction. The same
applies to all
the other con-
trol functions
(even
the
"
mixed"
f
unctions!).
But take care:
Always assign
control surtaces
alternately:
one
right,
one
left.
correct:
Alternate does
not necessarily
mean that the
servo
outputs must be directly
sequential.
lf
you
do
not keep to this
rule,
your
aileron differential
will work
incorrectly.
27
Finally a
practical
example
in
abbreviated
form.
A model
glider
with elevator and rudder, differential
ailerons.
sooilers and aero{ow release
(the
"FLAMIN-
GO" again).
First
you
make the connections
at
the receiver end:
Elevator is operated by servo No. 2
Rudder is
operated by servo
No.
3
Ailerons
are
operated
by Servos
No. 1
and 5
Spoilers
are operated
by servo
No. 4
Aero-tow release is operated by
servo
No.
6
Now to the assigning
procedure,
as described above:
(Note: you
will find that some of the
servos are already
assigned to the correct {unction when
you
select that
servo
No. Don't
be
put
off by this. Just for
practice,
press
the keys
"round
the
clock" one time, until
the
function
appears again. Of course,
you
never
actually
need to do this.)
N
key; then leaf through with
El
key
until
"2"
flashes.
Z
key; leaf through until
"ELEV"
appears.
N
key; move
Z
key; leal through with the
El
key
until
'RUDDER'
appears.
N
key; leaf
back
to
"1"
with the
El
key.
z
key; move to
"AILERON"
with the
E
key
S
key; forwards
again
with
E
to
"5"
Z
key;
"AILERON"
again
with the
E
key
N
key; one back to
"4",
with the
El
key
Z
key;
@
key until
"SPOILER"
flashes
N
key;
leaf
through
with
E
until
"6"
flashes.
Z
key;
E
key
until
"TOWHOOK"
flashes.
All done.
Leave the menu
with
the
E
key;
then
El
three
more
times, and
you
are back at the Status
Display.
';-;.
In
case
you
are
not tamiliar with
the
rather
sloppy
lan-
guage
we modellers
are
prone
to
use,
"adjusting
the
servos" doesn't
mean
attacking the servo
itself. lt is
more a
matter
of adiusting and setting up the
"servo
end" of the
transmitter. The
signals
for
each servo
are
produced
by the transmitter, and since they are not
modified at all after they have been transmitted,
the
ef-
tect of any adjustment
is the
same as
if it had been
made
at
the servo itselt.
In the following section we will describe
in
detail the ba-
sic adjustments
which can be made to the servos.
Reversing
the
direction
of servo rotation
(servo
reverse)
is
certainly
the most important aspect of this.
Please
note this
point
right now: the servos themselves are
never reversed
-
think
for
a
moment
of a simole
V-tail
mixer: elevator correct,
rudder incorrect. Now reverse
the
"servo":
rudder is now correct, but elevator
is incor-
rect. Moral: only
reverse
the
mixer inputl More on this
later.
You can also adjust the
neutral
position
of the servo
"electronically"
at the transmitter.
Finally we
have
the
possibility
of adjusting servo travel
-
separately
for
each side
of neutral.
While
reversing servos is almost a daily
necessity, the
two
other Jacilities are
more for
special
cases, and
for
the exoerienced
modeller who wants to tune
his
svstem
to a niln
level
of
refinement.
In this Section
we
are concerned
only with these
"sim-
ple"
adjustments.
There is a more complex side,
which
is concerned
with mixers. This
is
explained
in the Mixer
section
(page 45).
We will discuss
this in conjunction with
"02
FLAMIN-
GO".
How to
reverse
the direction
of servo
rotation
Starting
from the Status
display,
press
@
Z
to reach the
"
Servo adjustment"
menu.
You will see
this:
rTE:r,r+E:Etr.
LIHITt
LL:EHTF:E
-;t,J I TI-HT
Press the
Z
key
to select
"TRAVEL
+ REVERSE"
After this vou will see:
rSEF:.
1: t:tILEF;üH
L+ l
rjlrjr:i rj+
tl I LEFjr
First
you
have to tell the transmitter which servo
you
want to revetse.
Press
the
Z
key. The servo No.
("1")
starts to flash.
Now
you
can
press
the
El
and
E
keys
to
leaf
through
to
the desired servo. Once
you
have
displayed
the one
you
want,
press
the
fl
key. The
percentage
display
(the
set
travel) begins to tlash.
Please note: the travel display
has
a symbol
in front of
it
-
the
prefix
depending
on how it was
last
set.
Now comes a typical example
of how the
El
key is
useo:
Press this key, and
"+"
turns
into
"-",
or vice versa.
That action reversed the servo.
This was
a
simple,
standard
case, when the servo concerned
has no mixed
control
function.
We will
cover
this
area
in detail in the
"Mixers"
Section.
You leave the menu with the
m
key;
and
by
pressing
El
twice
more
you
return to
your
starting
point,
after
yet
an-
other
successful expedition
into
the
land of the keypad.
Fatal error; or a special
"feature"
Really this belongs to the
"Travel
adjustment"
section,
but this is
where
you
will look tor it.
How come this
feature is normally an error?
You
apply
right
-
the servo runs to the
right
-
so
far, so
good.
You apply
left
-
the servo
runs to the right again.
What's
happened?
Now, what
you
have done is this:
you
turned
past
"0"
when setting the servo travel.
Turning it
back
past
zero
again
reverses the movement and
removes the
prob-
tem.
lf
your
servo
now needs to be reversed,
press
El
once.
This
unusual
leature is important
for
the
helicopter
pilot.
For example:
mixing tail rotor and throttle. In this case
that
is
exactly
what is required
-
regardless of the di-
rection ot the change in tail
rotor,
the throttle
compensa-
tion must always occur
in
the same
direction,
propor
tional to the tail
rotor
deflection.
How to adjust
the
servo's
neutral
position
Within
reasonable
Iimits,
you
can adjust
the
neutral
po-
sition
of
the servos connected
to
each
receiver
output.
What's the
point
of that?
Adjusting
the
neutral
position
can be
useful:
for exam-
ple,
if
you
want
to use a servo
of a ditferent
make
with
your
new system.
Different
manufaclurers use
difJerent
standards,
and
you
may find that the output
arm of a
ro-
tary
output
servo
will not be at the correct
angle.
Another
case
might be that
you
find a servo's
neutral
position
non-central
for
any
reason, and
there
is no
means of adjustment
on the servo
itself.
Never use
this facility to
make up
for
pushrods
which have
turned out too
long or too short!
Generally
speaking
you
ought
to use this
facility as
sparingly
as
possible.
lt is
easy
to forget
whether
you
have
reset neutral
positions
or
not,
and
this can
lead to
confusion,
especially
since there
are so
many other ad-
justment
facilities
which have a
vaguely similar
-
but
not ouite
identical-effect.
This is
how
you
do
it:
Starting
from the Status
Display,
press
the
E Z
keys to
get
to the
"Servo
adiustment"
menu.
You will see
this
display:
rTFjil+E
Er,r.
L I r'lI Tr
rt-:Et{TE:E
5til
I TuHr
Select
the
"CENTRE"
menu
point
with the
!
key. Now
you
are at
the right
place,
and will see
a display
like
this:
r:;EFj.
1
:
H I LEF:r:rl.{
|_:EHTFIE:
+.
Ell:r
First
you
have to select
the correct servo.
Press the
Z
key;
the servo
No.
(in
our example
"l")
starts
flashing.
Press the
E
or
E
key to reach
the servo
No.
you
want. Once
it is displayed,
press
the
Z
key.
The value at
the right of the
bottom
line
starts
to
flash.
You can
now adjust
the offset
with the
E
or
E
key
to
any
point
between
+110/o
and
-110/o
in steps of 0.1ol0,
and then
from 110/o to
1100/o in 10l0 steps.
That's all
there is to
it. Press the
E]
key to leave the Ser-
vo adjustment
Menu,
and
then twice
more to
return to
the Status
Display.
How to
adjust servo
travel
The transmitter
offers
the facility
of
adiusting
the
travel
of each
servo: separately
for
both
sides of
neutral.
What
use is that?
The simplest
way of explaining
this
is
to
provide
a
few
practical
examples.
The
landing flaps
of a large-span
model aircraft
are op-
erated
by two
servos: one
for each flap.
Manufacturing
tolerances
in conventional
servos
have combined
to
produce
a slight
difference
in output travel.
The result of
this
is that
maximum
"down"
on the
flaps
produces
un'
eoual
flap movement, and
the model tends
to turn.
You
have two
options: seek
out two
matched servos,
with ex-
actly
equal
mechanical
travel, or utilise
the travel
adjust-
ment
facility.
A Doint to
note here
is that each
servo must
have
"its
own" receiver
output;
otherwise
it is not
possible
to ad'
just
the
travel of each
servo
independently
(use
the
fa-
cility of
assigning
multiple servos
to one
control
func-
tion:
page
26).
A similar case
might be
ailerons
with superimposed
camber-changing
f lap f
unction.
A
few more words
here before
we
get
down
to business:
Here we assume
that the servo
has one
"simple"
con-
trol function;
e.g. elevator
or aileron
without
mixing, or
undercarriage
actuation.
In
"mixed
control
functions"
the
same
procedure
is
used;
but then
it
gets
a
little
more complex,
because
in some cases
only certain
"in-
puts"
of the
overall travel are
to be adjusted
or shifted,
while the others
are to be
left unchanged.
More on this
in the
"Mixers"
section.
But
now to actually
adiusting
the travel.
From the Status
Display
you
reach
the
"Servo
adjust-
ment"
menu by
pressing
El
and
Z.
You
will
see
this:
rTF
Lr+F;Er,r,
L I i'1I
T1
rL:EtlTF:E
StrlITr::Hr
Select
"TRAVEL
+ REVERSE"
with the
Z
key.
The first step
is to
select
the servo
you
wish to ad-
iust.
Press
the
Z
key.
The servo
No.
("1"
in our
example)
starts
to flash.
LeaJ through the
servos
with the
El
and
Q
keys until the correct
number appears.
Select
servo
No.
3;
in the example
you
will see this:
r::EF:.
f,: E:l_l[rlrEF
r+
l Ut:tl.:
H+ F:l-l[i[!El
After the servo
No.
you
will
see
the control
function
-
a
double-check
that
you
have
the right servo.
But now to the
bottom
line
-
this
has
something
for
us:
Size
of tnvel
control
Direction
lnput
In our example
you
will see
A- next to the
value for
travel.
Move stick
A to the left: the
right arrow
turns into
a
left
arrow.
This display also
takes account
of the cur-
rent
position
of the trim slider,
so it
may
be
that in
your
case
you
see
a left arrow
first,
which turns
into
a
right
arrow
when
you
move the stick to
the right.
You will understand
it now: this
is the transmitter
control
which acts upon
the servo
you
have selected.
The
ar-
row shows the
direction
in which the control
is moved.
Now
press
the
!
key. The
"left-hand
bottom corner"
starts
flashing.
Hold the stick
at
its left-hand end-point;
as described
above,
you
will see
a left arrow.
lf
you
now
press
the
E
or
E
key, the
travel
value will change. Set
it to
"800/0".
Move the
stick to the
right-hand end-point
(right
anow)
and set
the travel
to
"900/0"
in the same
way.
That's it
for
now.
29
Are
you
beginning
to
feel
at
home with the system?
The servo
travel
which
corresponds
to
moving the
stick
to
the left
is
selected
and then adiusted
by
"stick
|eft".
The servo
travel
which
corresponds
to
moving the
stick
to the right
is
selected
and then
adiusted by
"stick
right".
lf
you
now
move the stick to
right
and
then
left
you
will
see
that
the travel value alternates
between 80
and
900/o.
The
prefix
in front of the
travel value shown
is normally
irrelevant when adjusting
servo travel
(there
is an ex-
ception: see
below); it shows
whether the servo's
whole
travel
is reversed; see also
page
28:
"Servo
reversing".
Leave the Servo
adjustment menu by
pressing
the
E)
key.
Now
a few more
points:
It
makes no ditference
how far
you
move the sticks
when making these
adjustments;
the only
important
ooint
is
the direction
in which the arrow taces.
lf it is not
iikely
to confuse
you, you
can
move
the
corresponding
trim slider
instead, and
leave the stick at centre.
The same applies
to all servos/control
functions. For
functions
which correspond to
forward/back stick
move-
ments, the right and
left arrows are
replaced by up
and
down arrows.
All
percentage
values refer to the
normal nominal
travel
of the servo concerned;
this
is usually
45
degrees
(aF
though
there are exceptions).
There
is no reason
why
you
should
not set extreme
travel
adjustments.
For instance,
in
the
example above
you
could
set the
left travel of the stick
to zero;
in that
case the servo
would
not move at all
when
you
move
the stick
in that direction.
You can even
set the travel
to
less than
zero,
i.e.
a
negative
value,
by
simply
pressing
the
n key.
The servo will
now move to the
right when
you
move
the stick to the
left, as well as
when
you
move
it to
the right
(as
you
have not changed
that side
of neu-
tral). Quite
why
you
might want to
do that
is
beyond
us
iust at
the moment!
Caution
-
a trap
for the unwary!
Please don't
set the
travel to zero on both
sides ol
neutral. The
result would
be
that the servo
does not
move at all.
lf
you
do
this for
some
reason, but then
forget that
you
have done
it,
you
will have an apparently
nonJunctioning
channel,
which will drive
you
uncomfortably
close
to the edge
of
insanity . . .
The other side
of this coin:
if
you get
"nothing
at
all" at
one receiver
output, check
first whether
you
have set
the servo
travel to zero by
mistake!
Servo
travel can also be
set to more than
usual: a sel-
ting of up to
1100/0 is
possible.
we
do
not recommend
using this
lacility excessively,
as, with certain
types of
servo
(linear
output servos
in
particular)
you
run the
risk
of
jamming
the
mechanics
mechanically.
You might
also like to bear
in mind that
an output travel
of more
than 45 degrees usually
provides
very little extra
move-
ment, due to the
geometry
of standard
mechanical
link-
ages.
How to
limit servo
travel
With
mixed functions it can
occur that the
sum of mixer
inputs exceeds
the
maximum travel
of the control sur'
face
(mechanical
limits), e.g.
mixed ailerons/flaps
with
flaps at the
launch
position.
Here the
variable servo
travel
limit
"LlMlT"
can
help.
lf
you
are still at
the
"Adjust
SERVO"
menu,
press
the
"LlMlT"
key and
you
will
see
the
following:
r::EFi.
1
:
LIIiIT:
H I LEFIÜI'I
+
1ül:tilr
Now
you
can set
the maximum
possible
travel
for each
servo
separately,
for each direction.
Return
to the Status display
with
@ @ El.
Full travel
is resumed
when
you
erase
a model
memory.
Caution:
when data
is transferred
between
two trans-
mitters
the LIMIT
values are
not transferred.
How
to
make travel
inputs switchable
In the
"swlTcH"
menu, which
you
reach
with the key
sequence @ZZ
(starting
trom the
basic display),
all
travel
inouts for the servos
can be switched
ON/OFF
or
rendered
switchable.
By
"switchable"
we
mean that a
physical
switch
is assigned to
that travel
input.
Let's
look at an
example: switch
to memory
07 SALTO,
then
move
to the
"SWITCH"
menu
(E)ZZ).
The dis-
play
will
look something
like this:
rSEFI.
1
:
FLHFEFIIH
rtl
l LEE::
Ul'l
r
lf this
is not
the case,
press
Z
and
select servo
1 with
the
EIE
keys.
Now
press
51,
and
AlLeron
will llash.
switch
between
the two
inputs
Alleron
servo
1
by
pressing
the
El
key.
30
You
and
can
now
FLAP
tor
At bottom
right
you
will
see
that the
aileron
input is al-
wavs switched
on,
while the
FLAP input can
be
switched
in
and
out using
the 53 switch.
In
practice
the system
works as
follows:
1.
Move to the
"SWITCH"
menu.
2.
Z:
Select servo.
3.
fl:
Select
input
El:
Switch ON/OFF
with
the
El
key.
Repeat until
you
have covered all
the inputs.
4. Return
to
ooint
2. and
continue until
all servos
have been
covered.
Another
trap tor the unwary:
lf
servos
which are
controlled
by mixed
functions ap-
pear
not to
respond to
the transmitter
controls
in the
way
you
intended,
then
you
may find that
the inputs
have been switched
OFF completely
in the
"SWITCH"
menu.
The second
possibility
is that the
inputs have
been assigned
to a
physical
switch
which
is in the
wrong
position.
Adlusting
tfie lransmittter
contrcls
In the
previous
section
we
discussed
setting
up the
"servo
end"
of the system;
now it is time
to concern
ourselves
with adjusting
the
"signal
source",
namely
the transmitter
controls.
An important difterence
The systematic
ditferentiation
between
"transmitter
end" and
"servo
end"
is
an
important characteristic
of
the
philosophy
behind
the PROFI
mc 3010.
For this rea-
son
we
would like to explain
this difference
once
more
in brief
,
before we
get
down
to business.
Once
again, examples
are the
best method
of explana-
üon.
ll vou want to
reduce the effectiveness
of the elevator,
it
mäy seem
to make
no
difference
whether
you
reduce
the travel
of the elevator
stick or electronically
reduce
the servo's
travel.
But
this is only true
if the application
is of the simplest
possible
type,
i.e. no signals are
"derived",
"mixed"
or
otherwise
influenced.
lf we
assume
in our example
that
there
are two elevator
servos
(e.9.
one for each elevator
panel),
then,
it we insist on
working at the
"servo
end",
the travel
of both servos
would have
to
be
reduced
separately.
Things
get
a little more difficult
il we suppose
that el-
evator
movement
is
also
intended to
involve the cam-
ber-changrng
flaps. ln this case
we would
need to re-
duce
the
"mixed
elevator
input"
to the flaps also;
other-
wise the
ratio of the
mixed functions
would alter.
How-
ever,
if we reduce the
movement at
the transmitter end,
things
are much easier:
all
we have to do
is reduce the
elevator
stick signal;
everything
that ls affected
by or de-
rived
from that signal
is automatically
reduced at
the
same
time.
A
second
example
would be
differential aileron
move-
ments
where
two separate aileron
servos are
used.
As
differential
is nothing more than
unequal servo
travel on
different
sides
ot neutral,
it would be
possible
to adjust
the
servos
themselves
individually.
But it is easier
if we
produce
the two aileron
control signals
at the stick
by a
"differential
circuit",
as
we
can
then set
the degree
of
differential
with one single
adjustment.
Correct
assignment
is important!
lf the differential
I
&
m
&
ffi
movement of
your
ailerons
works the
wrong way round,
please
see
page
33.
A turther example
is reversing
the direction
of rotation:
When
we reverse the
direction
of movement at
the
transmitter
control,
then this
reverses the
rotational di-
rection of all
the servos
(or,
more
precisely,
all the inputs
f rom this control)
which are
operated by
this transmitter
control.
This is not the same
as
reversing the servo
it-
self.
You can
probably
see
the
principle
already:
We have a
"flow
of signals", starting
at the
transmitter
controls
(the
signal
"source").
The
various influences
on the
signal then
follow
-
mixing arrangements,
signal
splitting
etc.
The servos and the
control surfaces
which
they operate
are the
final link in the chain.
lf we alter something at
the source
-
the transmitter
controls
-
then
that change affects
everything
which
is
influenced
by that control.
Each
transmitter control
is assigned
to a
particular
con-
trol
function
(elevator,
aileron,
.
. .). li
a
change
is made
to the transmitter
control,
that change
affects the entire
control
function
-
and
this is exactly
what
is
usually
re-
ourred.
One
more example:
it
you
want exponential
aileron con-
trol on a model
fitted with
"quadro-flaps"
(four
sepalate
wing control
surfaces),
then the entire
"aileron"
func-
tion needs
to be altered,
i.e. all four servos
at once.
lf, on the other
hand,
we try to set that
up by adjusting
one of the
servos, the change
will
only
affect that
one
servo.
To recap:
Adiustments at the
transmitter control
affect
the en'
tire control
function.
Adiustments
at the servo end
affect that
servo only.
Disfribution,
-
mixinq
The transmitter
control options
Now
it's time to discuss
the transmltter
control
adjust-
ment
facilities.
The complex-sounding
term
"transmitter
control
options"
is simply an overall
description
of the
adjustment
lacilities
which are
provided
for the
transmit-
ter controls.
You are
probably
familiar with
them already
from other
radio sets.
For example:
Dual Rates,
Expo-
nential
and so on.
These options
are supplied
"ready
made"
in
your
trans-
mitter, and
are oflered
via the
"Transmitter
Control
Ad-
justment"
menu. No
"assigning"
is necessary.
ln order
to activate
an
option,
you
simply
need to
"leat
through"
to
the appropriate
point
in the menu, then
set the
value
you
want. lf
you
do not need a
particular
option,
just
set
its value to 00/o
(or
1000/0, depending on
the type of
function).
Not all ootions are
available
tor
all
transmitter controls;
that would
not make sense
(who
would
want
a
retractable
undercarriage
with exponential
travel?).
The availability
of
the options
is
based
on
practical
requirements:
Dual Rates and
ExDonential:
Ailerons, elevator and
rudder.
Travel, adjustable separately
on both
sides of
neutral:
All functions exceDt
ailerons and
throttle.
31
Travel, symmetrical
adjustment:
Ailerons only.
Centre
adjustment:
All
tunctions except throttle,
flap and spoiler.
ldle trim:
Throttle and
spoiler only.
Differential:
Ailerons only,
provided
that at
least 2 servos are
assigned
to
this function.
Fixed value:
Not
for ailerons, elevatot
Iudder or
throttle; all
other
functions.
You can also use
two or
more of these options
together;
for example,
exponential and
Dual Rates on
aileron
(il
you
think
this will be to
your
advantage),
plus
differential
and
centre adjustment
also.
All
you
need
to do to apply
these
options
is increase the
value in the display.
In the case
of helicopters
there are
turther
possibilities;
we
will discuss
these in detail on
page
53.
But now,
finally, to business.
How to set
transmitter
control options
As we are
now talking about
adjusting the characteris-
tics of transmitter
controls,
move to the
"Transmitter
Control
Adiustment"
menu.
From the Status
display
you
reach the menu
with the
key sequence
EINN.
lf we
return to the
first
example
-
01 BIG
LIFT
-
you
will see
this display:
rt:t:
HILEF:
fl:rip't_tr
EFFEL:T:
E1::J
Press the
Z
key. The transmitter
control
letter
(in
our
example
"A')
starts to
f lash.
Now
you
can
"leaf
through"
the options
with the
El
and
E)
keys.
The various transmitter
controls
will appear one
after
the other; at the
same time
the display shows
which function
they operate.
Select,
for example,
"
Elevator"
(leave
it
flashing) and
press
the
N
key.
The option
"Expo"
flashes
in line 3.
You can now
leaf through again,
using
the
E
and
El
keys, and the transmitter
will offer
you
all
the available
ootions in turn.
The
"DualRate"
option
Press
Z
then
E
E E
to switch
to Control
D
(ELEvator),
then
to D-RATE
(Dual
Rates)
with
N
followed
by
OEl.
The display
will look like this:
r[:'
:
ELEtJt:t
[r-Fjt-tTEr
r5I+'
TFll.J:
F-,lli:r
Press the
tr
key.
The value at
bottom
right flashes.
You
can
alter
it using
the
El
and
El
keys.
1000/0 is
full
travel,
i.e.
no throw
reduction
when the switch
is operated;
at
50o/o
it
will
be
reduced
to half
when the switch
is oper'
ated.
You have set
up
"
Dual
Rates"
for the elevator.
But
wait a moment
-
there's
something
else!
In the bottom
left corner are
more symbols.
Press the
Sl
key: and
this
area of the
display
will begin
to flash.
Press
the
E
key until
"ON"
or
"OFF"
is shown
there.
This
much
will
probably
be clear:
this shows
whether
the
ootion
is switched
on or off.
You can switch
between
ON
and OFF
by
pressing
the
E
key.
Switch
to ON,
then
press
the
@
key. You
will see this:
r51+.+
TF:t"t.
Et:tl'lr
This
part
is
also
easy
to understand:
Dual
Rates
is one
option
which
requires
a switch,
namely
to switch
be-
tween
full and
reduced
travel; and
you
have
just
se-
lected
the switch
51
for this
purpose.
ll
you
don't
like
this
arrangement,
press
El
again and
32
will be se-
lected.
You
can continue
up
to 55
-
even
the
Teacher/Pupil
switch can
be used
(it you
insist).
You are
free to choose
which switch
it
"ought
to be".
.tz
However,
it
is important that
you
establish
your
own
"
personal
layout",
otherwise sooner
or
later
you
will
lind
yourself
totally contused.
Our suggested
layout:
Dual Rates,
aileron: 51
Dual
Rates, elevator: 52
Dual
Rates,
rudder: S3
The asterisk
(star)
And
now an explanation
of
what the symbols
after
the
switch
mean:
this rs a
real
connoisseur's
refinement:
Let us suppose
that
you
have selected
S2, and
that
"52"
is
still
flashing.
Press the
tr
key.
The small arrow
atter
"52"
is reversed.
You have
now reversed
the
swttch.
And the
point
ot that?
Well, many
pilots
want
Dual
Rates
"active"
when the
switch toggle
faces away
from them;
others
the opposite
way around.
You can se-
lect
it
vourself.
50
o/o
Fig.3
Caution
-
don't turn
the switches
themselves
round!
They
must be installed
as dictated
by the
Transmitter
Control
Test on
page
66;
otherwise
the whole arrange-
ment will be uoset.
The asterisk
(star)
which appears after
the arrow
in one
of the
two
oositions
shows that
the switch
is
"ON"
in
this Dosition.
This entire
"switch
corner" only
appears
on the screen
when
you
are dealing
with
an
option
which requires a
mechanical switch;
for
fixed-wing models
these are
"Dual
Flates" and
"Fixed
Value".
Dual Rates reduces
servo travel equally
in both direc-
tions,
and
is
controlled
by a
mechanical switch.
The
"Expo"
option
(exponential
travel)
An exponential
curve
is one
which increases dispropor
tionately the
further it
moves away from
zero. lts effect
on a control
function
is that the servo
makes small
movements
around centre,
but the turther
the stick
is
moved, the
more servo travel
increases.
At the stick's
end-point,
the servo
reaches its own normal end-point.
In
practice
the
result is that the
pilot
has very
fine
con-
trol of
the model
in normal flight, but still
has available
the
large control
surface
movements which are
occa-
sionally
required.
Selecting
and setting up
this option are carried
out ex-
actly as described
for Dual Rates above, so
we do
not
need to
repeat the
information in detail.
Exoonential
is not switchable; so
there is no
mechani-
cal switch
to
select.
00/o exoonential
means
normal, lin-
ear control
characteristics.
1000/0
is
the
maximum
possi-
ble
exDonential deviation
from normal.
Fig.21
The
"asymmetrical
travel adjustment"
option
This facility
allows
you
to adiust
maximum servo
travel
separately
for each of the
two directions of
the stick.
Fig.22
A typical
application
would be
in
a
model whose control
resDonse
is not equal in both directions,
perhaps
for
aerodynamic
reasons.
It is available
for
all control
functions
with the exception
of
"throttle"
and
"ailerons".
The first step
is to select
Control C
with the sequence
Z
and
ElE,
then
ASYM.
TRAVEL
with the key sequence
S,
followed by
El E.
This option
is located
in
the
"Transmitter
Control
Op-
tions"
menu, and
is found
by
"leafing
through":
r[!
FiU[i[iE
TFjHtJELI
fi
,-:r,rl'll,lETFi
: +
1
rllr:.:r
The adjustment
process
itself :
Press
the
Z
key; the set
value on the
right starts to
flash. Move stick
C to its
right-hand end-point;
the
small arrow
betore the displayed
value will tace
right. lf
you
adjust the
travel with the
El
and
El
keys,
this setting
applies to
travel to the
right of centre.
Move
the
stick to the
left
end-point;
the small
arrow
will
point
to the
left. You can now set
travel to the
left
(again
using
the
El
and
E
keys). looo/o
=
maximum
possible
travel; 00/o
=
zero travel.
That was simple enough.
One
further
point
to note:
In the adjustment
process
just
described
it makes
no
difference
whether
the stick is at
full right or
full left
movement-
The crucial
point
is that the small arrow
points
in the correct direction.
All
you
need to do
is move the stick slightly
to the de-
sired
side; even
moving the üim slider
is enough. Just
watch the small arrow;
it indicates whether
you
are ad-
justing
the
right-hand or left-hand travel.
In the case
of
'torclall'
movements or switches small
up and down
arrows appear.
The
"symmetrical
travel adjustment"
option
This option is only available
for
ailerons.
A travel adjust-
ment facility
for
both sides separately
would make no
sense
here; with two differential aileron servos the ef-
fect would be the same as
if
difterential
had
been
ap-
olied.
lf
you
have already tried out some ot the options de-
scribed above,
you
will have no trouble setting up this
f
unction;
it is carried out in exactly the same
way.
Here again:
1000/o
=
maximum
travel; 00/o
=
no travel
Fig. 23
The
"Centre
Trim"
option
This is available
for most
control
functions. lt is used to
shift the centre
position
of the transmitter control
"elec-
tronically";
it
has roughly
the same effect as
moving the
trim sliders.
The maximum
travels which
you
have set are not influ-
enced
by the centre adjustment
(i.e.
it works in the
same
way
as
the
"centre
trim" system used by the trim
sliders).
Fig.24
The adjustment
range is up to
1000/0, i.e. as far as the
end-point
of the corresponding
transmitter control.
The adiustment
procedure
is
simple:
Move to
the
"Transmitter
Options"
menu. Let's look at
transmitter control
D
=
Elevator as an
example.
First
press
the
Z
key and then
leaf through until
"Ctrl
D:ELEV"
appears.
Press the
S
key and
leaf
through
with the
El
key until
"Centre"
appears
in line
3
(flash-
ing). You
will then see this:
r[r
:
ELEl.Jtl
t_:E[.lTFlEr
TEIf'l:
+11:r
Press the
Z
key;
the
value
displayed
at bottom right will
flash. You can carry out the centre adjustment
you
want, using the
E
and
E
keys.
Once
you
have com-
pleted
the
adjustment,
return to the Status display with
the
E
key.
Here
are two
more
examples ot
typical applications
tor
this option.
Example 1:
You have seen that it is
possible
to offset
the
centre
by
up to
1000/0, i.e. to
one end-point.
It
you
select such an
extreme setting
-
in this example for one stick axis the
associated servo
does not move at all when the stick
is
moved to one side.
When it is moved to the other side
the servo carries
out its tull movement.
This facility could be used for a
glider
with
airbrakes:
the brakes are extended
when the throttle stick
is
moved back
from the centre
position.
Over the entire
'lorward'
hal{ of the stick travel
the
servo
does not re-
spond
at all, and stays at
full movement. You now have
full servo travel controlled by
half the stick movement.
Example 2:
perhaps
the most common application!
With
a
well-built and carefully trimmed
model the
posi-
tion of the trim sliders
is not
usually changed
in flight, or
only very slightly.
lf
you
adopt the
position
of the
trim
sliders as
your
centre adjustment,
you
will not need to
alter
the trims
when
you
change
models; the basic set-
ting of the trim sliders
is
then always
the centre
posi-
tion.
Caution: do
not
use the
transmitter control centre trim
facility to
"centre
up
servos". There
is
a separate
facility
provided
for this
(see page
29).
34
The
"ldle
Trim" option
This option
is only available
for the
"THROTTLE"
con-
trol
function
(or
THROTTLE-2).
lts effect is that
the throt-
tle stick
trim slider
is only effective
when the stick is at
its
"idle"
position.
lts effect
is
steadily
reduced towards
the centre
position
of the stick.
In the whole of the
full-
throttle
"half"
of
the
stick
arc
(especially
at
the
"full
throttle"
end-point)
the trim slider has
no
effect.
The
practical
advantage
oJ this option
is that
you
can
adjust the
idle setting of the
carburettor
without
aftec!
ing its
lull-throttle
position.
Selecting
and adjusting
this option
is
the same
as for
the other options already
described.
Adiustment
range:
0
0/o
in the display:
the
"throttle"
trim slider
has no
effect.
100 % in the display:
the
"throttle"
trim slider
adjusts
the idle
position
within the
whole of
one halt of the stick
arc.
In
practice (special
cases excepted) a
value of 20 to
300/0
is a sensible sefting.
One
further note:
Normally the
idle
position
of the throttle stick
is
"stick
back". lf
you
want
it
the
other way round
(e.9.
for
a
heli-
copter),
press
the
y
key once at the adjustment
stage.
This reverses the entire stick
function; idle is then
"for-
ward". This is
indicated in the display by a
minus
sign
(-)
in lront of the set value, instead of a
plus
sign
(+).
lf
the
servo
then rotates
in
the
wrong direction,
reverse it
Fis.25
as described on
page
28.
Stick
ldle trim
The
"Differential"
option
This option
is only available if a transmitter control
has
been assigned
to the control
function
"AILERON"
at
the
"Assigning"
stage, and
if
at
least two servos have
been
assigned
to
"aileron".
In all other cases
differential
makes
no
sense,
or can be
replaced
by
the option
"Asymmetrical
travel adjustment".
Fig. 26
To explain
how this works,
we will
take another
example.
The
transmitter controls and
servos have been as-
signed
as follows:
Transmitter control
A
=
AILERON; servo
1=
ATLERON; servo 5
=
AILERON
Starting
from the Status Display,
move to the
"Transmi!
ter Control
Adjustment"
menu. Press the
N
key
and
leaf through
with
El
until
you
see
"DlFFER."
in the dis-
play,
f lashing:
rH:
I I
LEF: ['I FFEF'I
HItit'l1'lETF:
! +Ir:rlir
It is vital that the servos
are assigned correctly, oth-
erwise the differential
movements
will not be correct
(see page
26).
Press the
Z
key; the value at bottom
right will flash.
You can
now
set
the degree of difterential
you
require
using the
E)
and
E
keys.
The f igures mean:
0
0/o -
no ditferential; same
movement up and down
lor both servos.
5O
o/o -
the
"down"
movement
is
only
half as large
as the
"
uD"
movement.
1oo
o/o -
maximum ditferential: each aileron
moves uo,
but does not move down at
all.
You don't need to
worry about anything else
when set-
ting up ditferential.
The differentiated
control signals are
sent
to the two servos automatically.
When setting the degree ot
difterential
you
can
"re-
verse" the differential
with the
El
key.
You will
find that it is
possible
to set up differential
ailerons correctly,
regardless of
your
installation, by us-
ing this option
in conjunction
with reversing one or both
servos
(see page
28). We
cannot
give general guide-
lines, however, as
there are so
many
possible
variations
in model design
and radio installation.
One
more tip
(which
also applies
to other adjustments):
It is
sometimes
easier and
quicker
to find exactly the
right settings by carrying
out
"
in flight" adjustments.
This is very
easy
using the Digi-Adjustor,
which is avail-
able
as an accessory:
Before
starting
a flight,
move to the appropriate menu
as
already described, and select
"Adjust
Value"
as de-
scribed above; but
this time don't leave the
menu!
t*=
\\
50
0,6
1(
\'.\-
^
\so&
\'.{;
'(
Difter.ntial
35
The
Digi-Adjustor
is connected
"in
parallel"
with the
El
and
El
keys, and
has exactly
the same effect,
namely ol
adjusting
the degree
of differential.
All
you
need to do
in
this
case
is to rotate the
Digi-Adjustor
while the model
is
flying
(don't
look down at
it!) until
you
are
satisfied.
Land
the model,
then leave
the menu by
pressing
the
E]
key
(everything
gets
stored
automatically
-
there's
nothing
more to be done).
Caution!
Although
it is theoretically
possible, you
should
never aitempt
to
make changes
via the
keypad while
the
model is
flying. You
would have to take
your
eyes
off
the model
to find the
right key; and
if
you
made a
mistake, the
results could
be catastrophic!
The
"Fixed
Value" option
-
what's
that?
"Dual
Rates",
"Exponential"
and so on are
terms Jamil-
iar to
the advanced
modeller.
He may not be on such
close
terms with
"Fixed
Value",
however.
The simplest
method of explaining
it is to describe
an
examore:
lmagine a
model
with
camber-changing
flaps which
are
operated
by the
right-hand slider
=
transmitter
control
F.
Travel
has been reduced
(using
the
"Travel"
option)
so
that
full flap movement
is in the
range
-5
to
+75 de-
grees
at the two
slider end-points
(this
is not necessary
to use
"Fixed
Value", but
it
does
show up
the useful-
ness
of the option).
NoW
on this
model there is a specitic
Jlap
position (+15
degrees)
which is only
needed for a
particular
f
light situ-
ation
(say,
launching).
Wouldn't
it be nice
if we could
move
the
flaps to this fixed
position
with a switch, then
return to
normal operation
again afterwards?
In order
to achieve
this it
would be necessary
for lhe
switch
to override
the
"normal"
flap control
signal, so
that the
flaps take
up a
pre-set,
fixed value.
This
is what
"Fixed
Value"
is
all
about.
"Fixed
Value"
moves the control
function
to a
pre-
set
fixed
value when the
associated switch
is
oper'
ated.
and overrides
the transmitter
control
itself.
There
are therefore
tlvo things
to set up:
First, of course,
the Fixed
Value itself
(in
o/o
of
full
travel).
Second,
the switch
which
is to
"activate"
the
Fixed
Value
has to be
selected.
Adiustment
is carried
out in a similar
way
to that de-
scribed
above
for
"Dual
Rates''.
Here
is another example:
rF:t:tl_liri.
1 FII:-1r
rrJFF
Stlli:,r
Selecting
the
Fixed Value
switch:
36
We will assume
that
you
have assigned
the controls
as
In order
to exploit
this option,
you
will need to use
the
follows:
special
3-position
switch
"S1".
lf
you
use the switch
I for
Transmitter
control
F
=
AUX.I;
gsrvo
g
=
AUX.1. this
purpose,
you
must not assign
it as
a transmitter
This
means that
the
right-hand slider
controls
the servo
control
Jor normal
usage;
i.e' Icontrols
=
""
connected
to receiver
output 6
(nothing)'
More
on this on
page
69'
Move
to the
"Transmitter
control
Adjustment"
menu.
lf-your brain
is slill
lunctioning
clearly'.
this is a
good
Select
Transmitter
Control
F, d;:i.^"'"""'
time
to
present
a
further reJinement
of this transmitter:
press
rhe
N
key; rhen
s
"g;,
un,ir
"Flx-1"
appears
äffi'H:1'iT"Ut["i,n:t".ofi':llj]tt"flöt
ilJSffil
You
will now
see this
display:
toni,-insteäO
äiä
noimat toggie
switch.'
Th'e optionat
ln our examole
this is to be
the switch 55.
Press the
Sl
key; the display
in the bottom
left-hand
corner
will flash.
It will
probably
show
"OFF".
Press
the
tr
key;
"OFF"
turns to
"ON".
Leaf through
with
the
E
key until
"55"
appears
(after
it
you
will see an arrow
and
possibly
an asterisk).
Operate
the switch 55;
at one
of the two
positions
the asterisk
must
appear.
This means that
the switch
is set to
"ON".
Adiusting
the Fixed
Value:
Press the
Z
key; the
value shown
in the bottom
right-
hand corner
starts
to flash.
You can
now adjust
the'Fixed
Value"
with the
El
and
El
keys. 00/o
means one servo
end-point;
1000/o the
other end-point.
For
example,
if
you
set the
value to
750lo
this means a
position
half-way between
centre and
one
end-ooint.
Now
you
can carry
out a
practical
test
to see how the
"Fixed
Value"
function works:
when switch
55 is
"Off",
the servo
can be controlled
in the normal
way with the
slider.
When set to
"On"
the servo
runs
to the
position
you
have
just
set.
lf
vou
now
want the switch
to
work the
"other
way
roünd",
press
the
S
key again;
"S5"
will flash.
Press
the
E
key, and
the arrow
after
"S5"
will be
reversed'
and
you
will find that
the direction
of switch
actuation
is
also
reversed.
lmportant
note
for F3B flyers:
When
"leafing
through" the
options
you
may
have no-
ticed
that there
is a
further option
"Fixed
Value-2".
You
can,
in
fact, set up
two
"Fixed
Values"
(Fixed Value and
Fixed
Value-2)
which
you
can
select at
will.
For example,
you
could
set up
two
pre-set
positions
for
camber-changing
flaps on a
glider:
"Tow"
and
"
SDeed".
"stick
press-button"
is one
example, or
the
momen'
tary
switch
which
is recommended
for operating
the
stopwatch.
In the
lollowing
we assume
that
you
have connected
a
momentary
switch
of this
type to
"S4".
Press the
N
key again. Go
past
"S5"
with the
E
key;
after the displays
"LS",
"H"
(control
H
is reserved for
the
Profi mc 3030) and
"1",
the symbol 51
appears
again,
but this
time followed by the symbol
instead
of
the arrow.
This indicates
that
a
momentary switch
is
now
"expected".
lf
you
wish to try out this option
you
will, of course,
have
to
install a momentary switch.
Press the momentary switch.
Servo No. 6
will run to the
pre-set
Fixed Value. Next time
you press
the button the
servo
responds to the slider again,
and so on.
In this
way
you
can use the
momentary switch to
re-
lease or activate a
function in the model which then
re-
mains
"on"
or
"off"
until
you press
the button again.
Caution!
lf
you
set up
this option
you
can
no longer see
at a
glance
the current state
of the
model, i.e. from the
position
of the switch
toggle.
For
this
reason we only
recommend using
this tacility
for
a
non-critical f unction,
or a function
which works in a delinite
and obvious se-
quence;
for example
"undercarriage
retracted/ex-
tended"
or
"smoke
generator
on/otf".
FIXED VAUE again
You can also assign a
servo directly to a
FIXED VALUE,
regardless of
what we have
just
said.
This then func-
tions as a
virtual control. Using any assigned
function
switch
you
can
run the associated servo
to and fro be-
tween
the two
positions you
have chosen.
Typical application:
Aero-tow
release or the tixed input
(offset)
of
a user-defined
mixer. But more on this
later.
The
"Normpos"
option
This option
is only oJ significance
in
conjunction
with
mixers.
When
you
extend
spoilers or
flaps it is
often
desirable to
compensate
for the change in
pitch
trim
which occurs.
To achieve
this,
part
of the spoiler signal
is bled olf to
the elevator
servo.
The following
problem
then arises:
The
"idle
position" (brakes
retracted) of the transmitter
spoiler
control
(e.9.
stick or slider) is usually
one of the
two end-points.
lf we were
just
to mix the spoiler
signal
with the elevator,
"full
movement" of the transmitter
control
would shift the elevator
significantly from
its neu-
tral
position.
This is not what we want; the
elevator
should
not
be affected
at all at the
"sooilers
retracted"
oosition.
This can be achieved
by sending the
"spoiler
-
eleva-
tor"
mixer a
"corrected"
signal,
instead of the true
spoiler signal
(curve
A in the diaglam).
lf the
"spoilers
retracted" end-point
is
point
X in
the diagram,
then a
signal corresponding
to curve
B
should
be sent to the
mixer.
For the end-point Y the correct
curve is curve C.
As
you
can see
from the diagram, the
mixer at the
"spoilers
retracted"
position
now receives a
"
zeto"
mixed input, but
it receives the normal,
full
compensa-
tion value at
"spoilers
extended".
There is not much to adjust
in this option.
lt is
activated
by
the transmitter automatically
when SPOILER
or
FLAP is assigned.
You only need to tell the transmitter
the oosition
of the transmitter
control for
"spoilers
re-
tracted"
-
t'back"
or
"forward".
As an example
we will consider
"09
CORTINA". Select
this
model, then, as in the
previous
examples,
press
@NN.
When leafing through the options
with
"SPOILER"
as
the transmitter
control the
following display appears:
rEt
:
:;Fü
I L f.luFjlitlLl
FIJ:;ITIÜH
I5:
T
1
Press the
Z
key; the arrow under
"Normpos"
starts to
flash.
You
can
reverse the facility
with the
El
key, if
nec-
essary
At
"Arrow
forward"
you
select
"idle
forward", and
vice
versa.
With the
E
key
you
switch
to Norm
Pos
"Centre",
and
if
your
transmitter control
is at centre
(a
-
sign
will be vis-
ible in the display)
you
can switch
over to one of
the
end-points with the
E
key. lf necessary
you
can
then
change the end-point
again by
pressing
El,
and select
whether
Norm Pos is to affect
forward movement
(r')
or
back
movement
(+).
The Norm-position
is the source
point
for mixed functions.
That's it; leave the menu
in the
usual
way with the
E)
key.
One
further
point
to note
in
this connection:
lf
you
wish to mix spoiler and elevator,
or flap and eleva-
tor,
you
must assign the corresponding
servo to
"ELE
+" instead ot'ELE'I
In this case the
inputs Flap
and
Sooiler
will
be available
in addition to elevator.
Spoilet.
,.4
Fig.27
37
How to use
lhe
"Com$-8vvitch"
The main use of the Combi-Switch
is to helD the less
experienced
pilot
handle the more
demanding
forms of
model
glider.
For aerodynamic reasons many
gliders
re-
ouire co-ordinated control ol
rudder
and ailerons
in or-
der to
fly
a smooth turn
-
just
like the full-size. However,
simultaneous control
of two functions can
present prob-
lems,
especially
for the less
practised pilot.
The Combi-Switch
is
used
to
couple
these two con-
trols electronically.
The coupling can be be turned
on
and otl via a switch, so that
it is
possible
to
switch between
"normal"
(separate
controls) and
coupled controls at any
time in flight.
You can choose
the way in which the coupling
works:
The
rudder follows
the ailerons;
in this case
you
operate both controls with the aileron stick;
or
The ailerons tollow the
rudder; in
this case
you
ooerate both controls with the
rudder
stick.
The
mode which
you
choose is a matter of
personal
preference.
In both cases
you
retain full
control
of the
"following"
(or
"slave")
f
unction
via its own stick.
A turther
point
which needs
explanation
here
is
the
"following
rate". lt can be set to any
point
between
0
and
20oo/o.
An explanation:
At
a
following rate of 500/0 the slave control
surface will
deflect
to half its
full
travel
when the master control
is
at
full throw. The only
way
of
getting greater
movement
from the
following control surface
is
to operate
its own
stick.
At a
following rate of 1000/0 both control
surfaces move
to the same
extent.
At a following ßte
ol 200o/o the slave control
surface de-
flects to
its full
extent
when the
master
control
surface
is
onlv at
haltthrow. It the master stick
is moved bevond
this ooint.
the master conlrol surlace
moves to
it; full
extent;
the slave control
surface stays at
tull throw
-
be-
cause there's
no more movement available.
It is very difficult
for us to make
recommendations
here,
as the
ideal following
rate varies from
model to model. lf
in
doubt,
you
could
start
with 1000/o
and
then carry
out
test
flights to find the best
setting for smooth,
tidy turns.
This is an
ideal case for using
the Digi-Adiustor,
as
you
can then
easily adjust
the tollowing
rate in
flight.
38
Now,
after this
necessary
preamble,
to the matter
in
hand:
You cannot set up the Combi-Switch until
you
have al-
ready assigned one transmitter control
to ailerons and
one to
rudder. You will
also
need to install a switch for
the
function
(e.g.
S5).
The
switch
well on the left of the
display
is
already
marked CS
=
Combi Switch.
We will take as our example
"06
FIESTA'.
You will find the soecial Combi-Switch
menu
under
"
Transmitter Control Adjustment".
From
the Status display
you
reach this menu with the
key sequence
Eltr.
Then
press
S
to
go
on. You will
see this display:
r
l
tilt_iij r_::,['J:
:,i+.
r
FlUtitiEFj
+f;
I LEFjr:rt.,l
"55+"
indicates
that switch 55
is selected as the Com-
bi-Switch. Press the
N
key,
and
"55+"
flashes. Using
the
El
and
E
keys
you
can
now
select
a different
switch. lf
you
continue
pressing
the
El
key the final op-
tion that appears
is
"ON".
Press
El,
and
"ON"
be-
comes
"OFF".
Now the Combi-Switch
is out of
circuit:
r
1t:1r:i:i [:11.il
!
[tFF
r
E:Llt:'[1EF:
+H
I LEF:r:rt]
As we don't
want that at the moment,
press
El
again
("ON"),
then the
E
key, until
"55+ "
appears again.
The + arrow after
"35"
indicates that the switch
is
on
-
i.e. the controls
are coupled
-
if
you
move the switch in
the direction
of the arrow.
lf
you
wish to
reverse
this,
press
the
y
key now; this reverses the direction
of op-
eration of the switch.
In the display
you
will see that the
'l
arrow turns
into a
r
arrow.
Incidentally:
when the switch
is in
the ON
position,
an
asterisk
appears after the arrow
in confirmation
(++).
Now
you
can select
whether aileron
is
to be
master and
rudder the slave,
or vice
versa.
Press the
Z
key; the
following rate value starts
to flash.
lf
you
press
the
E
key,
the bottom
line of the display
aF
ternates
between
"RUDDER
governs
AILERON" and
"AILERON
governs
RUDDER".
Leave it as
you
want
it
to
work. In our examole
we will leave it at
"AILERON
governs
RUDDER",
i.e. the aileron control
is
the
master.
Now
you
have to set the value
for
the
following rate: as
the appropriate
input
field is already flashing,
i.e.
"re-
leased", simply set the
value
you
want
with the
E
or
El
keys, or the Digi-Adjustor;
in our example
1000/0.
In the display
you
should
see the
following:
r
l
t1tit:.:
t_:5lr.l:
:,i.+.
1
F:l_t;:'X,gp'
+tl
I LEFIüH
That's all there
is to it:
you
can
leave the menu with the
@
key.
2OOo/o
\l\l
nq
\\
master slave
100 Vo
\/\/
fln
\\
master
slave
50
o/o
\t\l
flF
\\\
master slave
Fig.28
lf
you
want to adiust the
following rate in flight
(Digi-
Adjustor
required):
Before launching the
model, move to the
menu
as de-
scribed and
press
the
Z
key, to
release
the
value input
field.
Don't leave the
menu! While
you
are f lying
your
model
you
can
now vary the value of the following
rate
by
rotating the
Digi-Adjustor. Land the model and
press
the
@
key to store the value
you
have found to
be
cor-
rect.
Caution!
Never attempt to
make
changes
via the
keypad while
the model is
flying. You would have to take
your
eyes
off the
model to find the right
key;
and
if
you
made a
mistake, the results could be catastrophic!
For in-
flight adjustments use the
Digi-Adiustor, which
you
can operate
"blind".
Msmoäes and
#$b
When
you
were deciding
which radio
set
to
purchase,
the fact that the
PROFI mc 3010 transmitter can store,
or memorise,
up to 30 different
models was
undoubt-
edly
an important
factor.
First a little information on the
way in which the PROFI
mc 3010 records and stores
the model information.
Then we
will move on to the more
practical
matter
of
the
"
Memory"
Menu
and
its
sub-menus,
which are used
for:
copyrng memones
erasrng
memones
switching
memories
namrng memofles
checking and
matching trim settings
The model
list
-
a simple
principle
lmagine one
ot
your
models. And now
imagine all the
asoects
of that model
for which the transmitter
has to
be
ad.iusted
(the
technical
term is
"configured").
For example,
the settings
might
be:
Aileron on the
right-hand stick; elevator
left;
exoonential
on elevator:
differential
ailerons, adjusted
to a
particular
value;
sweet
bomb
release, actuated by a switch,
the normal
position
of the trim sliders;
direction
of servo
rotation;
elc....
lf
your
transmitter
had no
"
memory",
you
would
prob-
ably
write down all these
points
in
a
list and
-
when
you
change
models
-
re-adjust the transmitter according
to
this list. You
would write the name of the
model at the
too of the list.
The
PROFI mc 3010 transmitter does
exactly that.
lf
you
have already owned
a transmitter
with
a
memory,
it is best to
forget right now that
it
used
"programs"
and
"adjustment
values".
These
"programs"
were nothing
more exotic than
lists oi mixing arrangements,
control
characteristics
etc.,
made
up by
the radio manufacturer;
usually
they could only be
modified slightly,
if
at all.
You
might have liked a
flap
-
elevator mixer
instead ot the
V-tail mixer
-
but that
was only available
in
another
"program"
. . .
The PROFI
mc
3010
is
quite
honest about the
matter
ol
"
programs".
For each model
your
transmitter draws up a
"list".
lt in-
cludes everything
that applies to that
particular
model.
You do
not need to speciJically create this
list: when
you
set up the transmitter
to meet
your
requirements, the
transmitter
assembles the
list
automatically:
everything
that
you
select or adjust
is
"noted
down" by the trans-
mitter.
Thus
you
do not need to store the
list in
a
sepa-
rate
procedure;
if
you
switch
off, then on again, the
list
you
last used
is
"there
again"
immediately.
You
might object at this
point:
"that's
all very well, but
now
I
always
have to make up
this list before I can fly a
new
model, i-e. scratch around
for the
different
assign'
ments, mixers etc. That sounds complicated,
and other
manufactu rers offer ready-made
programs!"
We have two answers to this:
1.) You will soon see
that the
procedure
is
by
no means
complicated
or difficult.
For
your
slight effort, how-
ever,
your
reward is that
you
can
seek out and as-
semble
precisely
those options and
features that
you
want,
"a
la carte".
And
you
can
leave out what
you
don't need.
2. In any case,
iJ the rdea of so
much
"work"
is off-
putting,
or
you
do
not trust
your
ability at
first, the
transmitter
includes 10 ready-made
lists as stand-
ard,
which cater for the
vast majority of models.
Some
other manufacturers
would call this
provision
"
10
programs"
. . .
How many lists are available?
The transmitter
can store 30 such
lists, and recall any
one ol
them at any time,
when
you
want to change
mod-
els.
This is
probably
the most frequently used
"memory
operation", and
it could hardly be easier.
When
you
want to
"call
up"
a different
list, move to the
"Memory"
menu, select
"SHIFT",
then
"leaf
through"
to the model
you
want lo
fly
(model
names
in English
'
no codes!),
and that's
(almost)
all there
is to it. See
page
43 for
more details of this
procedure.
But there are other
"memory
operationst'.
For
example,
you
can create a
copy of a tried and
tested list, and
you
can then
give
the copy a
new name. You can
"clear
the
decks"
and erase
lists which
you
no longer
need;
and
much more.
eo
We don't
mind
i{
you
want
to use the
ordinary
terms.
We
have used
the
word
"list"
here, because
that
is
what
the transmitter
actually
assembles
for each
model,
and
because
a
list is easier
to imagine
than a
"pro-
gram".
Now, it
has become
usual to
talk of
"storing
models"
or
"copying
memories".
In fact it would be
pretty
difficult
to
store
even one
model
in a transmitter
-
it
just
ain't big
enough.
Copying
the
memory chips
in the transmitter
is
not exactly
a simple
job,
either.
Joking
aside: everybody
knows what
the terms
mean.
But
we think
it is worthwhile
cultivating
a clear
and cor-
rect style
of thinking
when dealing
with this
equipment.
Everything
that
the transmitter
"needs
to know"
about
a
particulär
model
is included
in a list, and
the list
is
contained
in a memory.
When a
memory
is copied,
it is
the
contents
of the
memory
which are duplicated
in
a
different
memory, and
so on.
Are
we splitting
hairs?
We have to admit
that
we occa-
sionally
use
the terms
"list",
"memory"
and
"model"
interchangeably.
In this
manual we sometimes
use
the
one
term,
sometimes
the other,
depending
on what
is
most appropriate.
However,
if the
"sloppy"
terms
occa-
sionally
sound
less than
precise,
then
you
at least
know
why, and
can always
keep the
idea of the
list in the back
of
your
mind.
One
important
point
to
remember:
The
model
which is shown
in the display,
and
which
you
are
actually
tlying,
is the
"current"
model.
lf
you
make any
changes
(e.9.
to the trims,
to servo
travel,
to mixing
ratios etc.),
then
the
modification
is
al-
ways recorded
in the
list
(the
"current"
list) automati-
cally,
immediately.
When
you
switch off,
the memory
is
therefore
always
"uP
to date".
When
you
switch
on again,
this
"latest
state"
is auto-
matically
restored,
i.e.
you
never
need to store
anything
expressly.
We have
found that
this
is the easiest and
most
natural method
of
working, and
the one
which
strains
the old
grey
cells the
least.
But take care
-
there could
be a catch!
Let us
imagine that
you
have test-flown
a new
model
and
trimmed
it out
with
great
care.
You would
not want
to risk
making any
lurther changes
to this
"ideal
list".
Nevertheless,
you
would
like to try something
out as
an
experiment
-
but
this
would change
your
hard-won
list.
Or
perhaps you
have built
a new, similar
model, and
want
to use the same
list,
with minor
modiJications.
What to do?
Well, the solution
to the
problem
is simple: copy
the
list
into a
different
memory,
then
"shift"
to the
new
memory and experiment
to
your
heart's content.
This also
applies
to the
"ready-made"
sample
lists.
While
you
are unfamiliar
with the transmitter,
you
should
always
work on
copies of
the original
lists,
and
not
on
the
"genuine
originals".
For this
reason
"copying
memories"
is one of
the
most
important things
to
learn at the start.
lt's sim-
pler
than
you
might think!
The
"Memory"
Menu
All the tasks
connected
with
memories are carried
out
from the
"Memory"
menu.
From the Status
display
you
reach
this
menu with the
key sequence
@ f)
.
You will
see this display:
r[:[rF
ti
HHt'lEr
t5H
I FT
I]HFi.
TFI I I'1r
From
here
you
select
the Jollowing
points
with the arrow
Keys:
Copying
Z:
The term
"copying"
covers the
actual copying
of
one
memory
to another,
but also
related tasks,
such
as
translerring
a
list from one transmitter
to
another.
Naming
N:
This allows
you
to
enter or
modify the
model's
name in
the
list.
shifring
!:
This
is where
you go
to switch
to a ditferent
model
whose
list
you
have already stored.
Trim
Z:
From
this sub-menu
you
can
check
whether the
posi-
tion of the
trim sliders
has been
moved
since
"
last
time".
More accurately:
since
the last time
you
used
this
memory
Atter
you
shift
memories this
menu
is called up auto-
matically,
as
it is very
likely that the
trims
have been
moved since
the last time
you
used
the
"new"
memory.
Naturally,
you
can
also call
up this
menu without
switch-
ing memories.
In
normal use,
when
you
switch
on the
transmitter
there
is no automatic
check
that the the
trim
sliders
are still
at the
position
where they
were when
you
last switched
off, so this
is a useful
feature.
For example,
if
you
think
that they
might
have been
moved, but
you
are not
quite
sure.
These
four sub-menus
are explained
in
greater
detail
below.
40
The
"Copy"
Menu
From the Status
Display
you
reach
the
"
Memory"
Menu
with
the
key
sequence
@S,
and
move from
there
to the
"Copy"
Menu with the
Z
key. You will then
see this:
rl'lü[iE
:
FULL
rFF:f'l. 15: El'l 1 1i
"Mode:"
is the route to several
possible
variations from
the simple copying
procedure.
We will discuss these
later. At the moment we will only discuss the
"normal"
copying
process,
which is used
most frequently.
How to copy a
model list
Here we assume that
you
are already at the
"Copy"
Menu, as described above, and that the display
is
as
shown above.
The
tirst line
(Mode:
ALL)
does
not interest us at this
oornI.
The second
line
shows the
"source";
namely
the
number
and
name
of
the model list which
you
want
to copy. The transmitter suggests,
in
the
lack
of better
knowledge,
the
"current"
model.
We will assume that
you
want to copy a model; e.g. the
model
"BlG
LIFT" in memory No. 10.
Press the
N
key; the memory number begins to flash.
You can now
"leaf
through" the memories using the
El
or
E
keys,
or
the Digi-Adjustor,
until
BIG LIFT appears.
This defines the
"source".
The
display
looks like this:
rIiUIlE
:
FULL
LFFjt'l. I
t:'r :
E I
rjl
I FT
Now
press
the
El
key,
and
the
source
memory stops
flashing. You have now copied this list into the currently
active
memory.
Caution: all copying
procedures
always
copy into the
currently active
memory
Press the
@
key
and
you
are
done. A copy of BIG LIFT
now resides
in the
current
memory. Leave the menu
in
the usual
way with the
@
key.
Here is the whole
procedure
again
in brief:
The
destination
(the
memory No. where the new
copy is to be located) is always the current
memory).
Select
the
source
(the
model which
you
want to
copy) in line 2. Press the
El
key; the transmitter
makes the
copy.
L€ave the menu with the
@)
key.
Note:
As
you
have seen in the example,
you
do not need to
"delete"
the
"destination"
memory
before
you
copy.
Two more
tips
Tip No.
1
On
occasion
you
may have second thoughts, and de-
cide not to copy anything, in spite of being at the
"Copy"
Menu
(1or
example,
you
may find that
there
is
no vacant memory). You cannot
just
leave the menu
without doing anything, since
pressing
the k key
to
leave the
menu would
execute the copying
procedure.
What to do?
There
are
two ways out of this
problem.
The first: select as
"source"
the current memory, and
then
press
the
@
key. You have then copied the
model
on top of
itself, which means that nothing has changed.
Or
the second:
just
switch off the transmitter.
Tip No. 2
Let
us assume
that
you
notice too late that
you
have
copied a
list into the wrong memory, and have thus
overwritten the list stored there. Now
you've
done
it! But
it's not a disaster. Please see
page
42 lor the final res-
cue solution
(Memory
"
Mx").
How to erase
a memory
lJ
you
are creating a
"new"
list, the
simplest
and least
confusing
route is usually to
pick
a memory which
is va-
cant,
or emply.
This is not absolutely essential, as
everything which
you
enter
when
assigning
and adjusting overwrites the old
contents
of the memory in any case. However, bear
in
mind
that some aspect of the
previous
model might lurk
unseen
in the new
list,
and
it
could
give you
a nasty sur-
prise
at an
inopportune moment.
For this reason the transmitter offers the ootion of eras-
ing the contents
of
a
memory. This is done from the
"Copy"
memory.
Here is where the
line
"Mode: "
comes
into
play
-
the
line we skipped earlier on.
We
shall assume
that
you
are still at the
"Copy"
menu.
Press the
Z
key, and
"ALLi'
on the
right
starts to
flash.
Now
press
the
El
key,
and
"CONTROLS"
(transmitter
controls)
appears. Press the
El
key again, and
it
turns
into
"ERASE".
This is the mode
which we now need:
r[''lt_t[:rf
rFF:l'1.
'+'EFiHIE
Ef,tFTtj
Now
press
the
El
key, and the current
memory is
erased.
Press
@
again to
leave the menu.
Note:
The erasure
process
always
works on the
current
(ac-
tive)
memory.
41
The
"TRANSMITTER
CONTROU'
copying
mode
Earlier on
in
this Copying section
we used the
"ALL"
copy
mode. This simply copies the entire
"list",
i.e.
all
assignments and settings
of transmitter controls and
servos,
into the new memory.
As
you
have already seen
when
you
leafed
through
to
the
"
ERASE' mode,
there
is
also
the
(transmitter)
"CONTBOL"
mode. This is
easily explained:
lf
you
select the
"CONTROII'
copy mode, only the as-
signments and adjustments of the transmitter controls
are copied
into the current memory. The
"servo
side" is
not cooied.
The
reason for this mode:
Many
pilots
have a
"standard"
assignment and ar-
rangement of the transmitter controls, which they use
for
every
model. lf
you
acquire a new model, in which
only the servo arrangement is different,
you
can use
this copying
mode instead
of
the normal assigning and
adjustment
procedure
for
the
transmitter controls. For
the
more
complex
models
(e.9.
helicopters, or models
with many
control
surfaces), this can save time.
It is never
absolutely essential
to
use
this mode;
you
could
just
as easily spend a
little more time and assign
and adjust
your
transmitter controls step by step, as de-
scribed earlier in this manual.
It is not necessary
to describe
how
to copy
the
"CON-
TROLS". Apart trom the fact that
you
select
"CON-
TROLS" tirst. the
Drocedure
is exactlv the same as
when copying
"ALIJ'.
The
"EXPORT"
and
"IMPORT"
copy
mode
These two
"exotic"
modes of copying are used to trans-
fer
entire
"lists"
from one lransmitter to another. More
details
of this on
page
70.
Note:
You may
be surpnsed to see terms such as
lM-
PORT
and
EXPORT, which appear to have nothing to
do with modelling. The reason
is
simple:
your
transmit-
ter's
programmer
was forced
to
pick
words which
de-
scribe the
feature
as accurately as
possible,
which
at
the same time would fit within the maximum available
number oJ letters!
The
"Mx"
memory
-
the
point
of
no return
When
"leafing
through" the
memories
you
may well
have come across
the fact that there are not really 30
memories:
there are 31. Between memories No. 30 and
l there
is
another
memory designated
"Mx".
However,
you
cannot use this memory to store a
model
permanently,
like the other memories.
lt is
"adminis-
tered" by the transmitter
itself, in
the
following way:
1)
When
you
erase a memory the transmitter auto-
matically stores a copy ot the deleted
memory in
Mx.
2) When
you
copy a memory, the transmitter auto-
matically
stores
a
copy ot
the
previous
contents
of
the
"destination"
memory.
3)
The transmitter automatically stores
a
copy of
the
current
memory as
soon
as
you
start modifying
anything in it, e.g. assignments or adiustments.
lt
does this before the
modification in the current
memory takes effect,
and
only
at the first moditi-
cation.
And the
point
of
all this?
Well, the first case
is
quite
obvious.
lf
you
make a mis-
take and erase
the wrong memory,
you
have a
"second
chance":
copy it back from
"Mx"
into the erased
memory, and all
is well.
The
second
case
is
also clear:
if
you
copy
into the
wrong memory by
mistake,
and overwrite
its
previous
contents,
you
can still save
the
situation, because
a
42
copy of the overwntten list is now in
"Mx".
Simply copy
it back
from
"Mx"
into
the correct
memory,
and
once
again
your
bacon
is saved.
In
the
third
case
the reasoning is not
quite
so obvious,
but the
reason is similar. When modifying a list there is
always
the danger that
you
will make a fatal error. Per-
haps the modification does not
produce
the desired ef-
fect. You know
by
now
(see page
40) that every
change
is executed immediately in the current memory. Unless
you
made
a back-up copy beforehand, and
are working
on the copy, the original
list would
be
lost for ever.
The
automatic creation of a
"back-up
copy"
reduces
this
risk. In
an emergency
you
can recreate the
"old
state"
again, by copying the contents of
"Mx"
back into
the current memory, as described above.
There is
another
use:
Suppose
that
you
want to
"swap
models", i.e. move two
lists into each others' location.
To
do this
you
need
an
intermediate storage
location. You
could,
in fact,
use
any free memory.
However, if
there
is no vacant
memory available,
you
can't do
that. And in any
case
it
is
easier
to use
"Mx"
as the intermediate store.
As an example, we will assume that
you
want
to
inter-
change
the
contents
of memories No. 14 and 16.
First copy No. 14 to No. 16. The transmitter automati-
cally copies the
previous
contents of
No. 16 to
uMx".
Now
all
you
need to
do
is
copy
the contenls
back to
No. 14.
and vou are
finished.
The
"SHIFT"
Menu
How to switch models
To switch
the transmitter over to another model
-
it
must already be stored in a memory, of course
-
you
just
need to
"call
it
up".
You
don't
need to worry about
the
"current"
model
(the
model in use belore
you
change
memories); i.e.
you
do not have to
"save"
it first.
As changing
models is
a
Memory
operation,
move to
the
"MEMORY"
Menu from the
Status
Display, with the
key
sequence
@ 13
.
You will see something like this:
Ff'r-rE,t.t hlühltrl
'
':U
T trT r'Ut' Ttr' T t'1 ,
L_rttIt I
r_.t
1.
r I t1. IttI
You will see at once that
you
have to
press
the
!
key,
next to the word
"SHIFT".
You will see a
new
display:
SHIFTIHIl FILE
TI:I tEIl
:
EII UL I FT
Press the
!
key; the memory No. begins to
flash.
"Leaf
through"
the memories using the
E
or
E
keys,
or the
Digi-Adjustor.
As the
numbers
change,
naturally the
actual
name of
the
model changes too, so that
you quickly
find
your
way to
your
destination.
Once
you
have found the memory
you
want
-
in our
example
"02
FLAMINGO",
press
the
El
key, and
you
are
f inished
-
well,
almost!
There
is
iust
one
little
problem: you
need to set the
trim sliders
back to where they were last time
you
Jlew
the new model. The transmitter cannot do
it by itself; it
has
plenty
of brain
power,
but
no muscle
power.
To cater
foi
this,
the
"TRIM
POSITION" menu appears
automatically
when
you
shift memories.
Note:
in
the
fairly
unlikely eventuality
that
you
have not
shifted
the trims at all since
you
last Jlew this model,
you
will see equals signs
("
=
")
instead of arrows.
Exolanation
in
a
moment!
lf
you
do
not wish to
adjust
the trims, for whatever rea-
son,
press
the
@
key to leave the
menu. Press
El
twice
more, and
you
are back to the Status display
-
all done!
Normally, however,
you
will
want
to
reset
the trims to
the earlier
positions.
As an example, we will do this
for
transmitter control
A
in
the above display:
Under
"A"
you
see an arrow
pointing
to the right.
Push
the associated trim slider
(transmitter
control A
=
left
stick,
righuleft) slowly to the right. At a
particular
point
the arrow will turn into an
"
=
"
sign
-
that's all
there is to it.
ll
you push
the trim slider further to the right, the
"="
is
replaced by an arrow
pointing
left. Now
you
can see
what the
arrows
mean: they indicate the direction
in
which
you
must
move
the trim slider
in order to reach
the correct setting.
Adjust the trim sliders
for B,
C and
D in
the same
way.
You
are
now finished, so
press
@
three times to
return
to the Status display.
r 11 l-r r-. l-r
rHtr'l-.LJ
riri
1}' 1
'+'
5T I
til';
EEFIJFIE
The
"NAME"
menu
How
to
enter or
change a model name
The transmitter stores
the various models in its memory
under the
numbers 1 to 30. For
you
as user it
is much
easier
to be able to recognise each model by
its name.
Mind
you,
this assumes that
you give your
models sen-
sible
names;
"Model
No. 27" doesn't reveal much!
For this
reason
you
can differentiate
each
"model
list"
with a
name. This name is then stored with the appro-
priate
model
(=
memory) No.,
and displayed
with the
numoer.
There are certain
restrictions to model names:
1. Names
may
be
no more than 8 characters long.
"Characters"
in
this sense are
letters, numbers and
certain
"special
symbols",
as in the following list:
1O123456789:;=?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSIUWXYZ
Please
note
that
there is an extra character between
"?"
and
"N'
-
a blank space,
which is also considered
a character.
For example,
"ASW
20" is 6 characters
long.
"ASW20"
is only 5 characters
long.
You don't need to
worry
about sticking
to the
permissi-
ble characters, as
the transmitter does not let
you
use
any others.
For instance, lower-case
letters
cannot
be
used and
are not made available to
vou.
Very important: the eighth character should
not nor-
mally
be a
number. There rs a
"special
function" which
requires
a
number as the eighth character, so do
not
use one
otherwise. More details of
memory
switching
on
page
68.
Here are a
few
oossible
names
ASW 20, ryPHOON, CORTINA, STUKA,
NONAME;
CORTINA3 or STUKA 01 are
also
possible,
but read
page
68 and
heed the warnings first!
Tip: ll
you
have a model list in a memory
which
you
no
longer need,
and
you
want to mark it as such,
it is
best
to erase
it altogether. The erasure
process
gives
it the
name EMPTY automatically.
You may think
you
will
remember
which memory is obsolete, but
you
won't.
lt
makes much more sense to erase memories
which
are
no longer in use, than to continue to store
"dead
lists".
After this
necessary
preamble
-
let's
get
down to
it:
From the Status display select
the
"Memory"
menu,
with the
key
sequence
@ !
. You will see a display simi-
lar
to this:
rrjrJFT
HHf'lEr
I:;H I FT
I-:HI.I.
TE I I'1r
Now select the sub-menu
'NAME"
with
[l.
This is what
vou will see:
43
F I LE:
I]üI
t'lFll'lE
I
FLHI'Il
l'ltiU^t
The display
automatically shows
the number and name
of the
"current"
model. In our examole this
is No. 06
and
"FLAMINGO".
lf
you
want to change the
name or
pick
another
number,
you
must first select the
memory No. To do this
press
the
N
key; the displayed
number starts to
flash. You
can now select
the number
you
want,
using
the
El
and
E
keys
(or
the Digi-Adjustor)
As
you
do
this, the name
displayed
will
also change,
as it always relates to
what
is In the
new memory.
We will imagine that
you
have selected Number 09
"CORTINA'.
The new name is to be
"BAMBINO".
F I LE:
rir'_-rl
HHHE:
t_:t:rFjT
I Ht:t ,r
Press the
Z
key- The
"C"
of CORTINA starts
tlashing.
Using
the
El
and
E)
keys,
or
the Digi-Adjustor,
you
can
now change the
"C".
In our example that
is
simple;
press
the
Q
key
once, and
"C"
turns into
"8".
Now.it's
the
turn of
"O".
Press
the
Z
key again, and the
"O"
flashes. Change
the
O
to A, again using the
El
and
E
keys.
Move to the next letter with the
Z
key,
and so
on.
The
"underline"
character,
which
you
will see alternat
ing
with the Jlashing letter,
is known as the cursor: the
cursor
marks the current
position.
Without the cursor
you
would not see anything
at a blank space.
Enter the
new name letter by
letter. lf
you
look caretully
when
you press
the
El
and
E
keys,
you
will see that the
various characters appear
in the display
in
the
sequence stated on the
previous page.
lf
you
want to
enter a space, select
the
"space"
symbol
(between
,,7"
and,,N').
When
entering
a name
you
can
only work from left to
right, one character at a
time. lf
you
make a
mistake,
don't
worry. You simply
press
the
Z
key until
you
reach
the eighth character, after
which the sequence begins
agarn.
For those of
you
with
absolutely
no experience
of
com-
puters,
we
will recap:
The old name
is not
"erased"
immediately;
instead
each
letter is overwritten
in turn by the new name.
Where there
is to be
"no
new
letter",
you
have to
overwrite
with a space.
Now we will assume
that
you
have tackled
this task
suc-
cessfully and
the new name is on display.
Press the
E]
key
to
leave the menu; then
press
it
twice
more, and
you
are
back to where
you
started:
the
Status
display.
The
"TRIM"
menu
How to
check the
position
of the
trim
sliders
The transmitter
"remembers"
the
Dosition
of the trim
sliders
by entering their
values in the
"current
list".
This
gives you
the chance
to check, if
you
switch
on and
think that
the trims might
have
been shifted
accidentally
since
the last time
you
flew.
This is the Drocedure:
From the Status
display
press
El
and
5l
to
go
to the
"Memory"
menu. Now select
"TRIM"
with the
Z
key.
You
will
see
a display similar to this:
lf
your
display
were exactly
like
this
one,
you
would cor-
rect the
trims as follows: slide
the trim slider A slowly to
the
right. At a
particular
point
the right-facing arrow
under
"A"
would
be
replaced by an equals
(=)
sign. lf
you
were
to
push
it further to the
right,
you
would see a
leftJacing
arrow.
The arrow after
the colon
(:)
indicates the direction
in which
you
have to move the trim slider
in
order
to
match the current
position
with the
stored
position.
In our example
you
would have to
move the A trim to
the
right, the B trim
forward, the C trim left and the
D
trim back, until an equals
sign appears at each
point.
You can
now leave the menu with the
@
key.
Note:
Every time
you
change models
(shift
memories) this
menu appears, as
you
will have been flying a different
model in the
meantime, and it is
very likely that
you
needed to adjust
the trims. And
you
will certainly want
to carry
on flying
with
the
trims set to the same
posi-
tions as the
last
time
you
f lew the model.
Caution:
Even if
you
are only entering
the data
tor
a
model
temporarily, be sure
to set the trims.
ll
you
don't,
the
trim slider
positions
tor that
model will be lost next
time
you
slritch
memories.
!
Fl Ei
r:.
[:'
.+,
rTtT.*.
!;T I L:Ii:
EEFr:rE:E
44
In this Section
you
will
get
to know the
mixers which the
transmitter has to otfer.
Before
you
dive in here,
please
make sure that
you
are
familiar with the simpler setting-up tasks, such
as
assigning
transmitter controls and servos, adjusting
servo travel and direction and so on.
Practise these
oro-
cedures several
times until
you
teel at home with them.
In our examples we will
restrict
ourselves to
fixed-wing
model aircratt:
helicopters
are covered
in a separate
Section
(page
53).
Nevertheless, all the basic informa-
tion
we
provide
here applies
in full measure
to the spe-
cialised
helicooter mixers.
The
mixers
provided
by the PROFI mc 3010 are oper-
ated
in
a
rather
different
way from normal. We think that
this new type of
"operating
philosophy"
is much sim-
oler than
the
conventional
method.
For
this
reason we will first discuss our
new method
of
considering
mixers. You will see that the concept
fits in
elegantly
with
the simple and
logical overall concept of
the transmitter,
with which
you
are by now familiar.
After
this
we
describe
the characteristics of the
"pre-de-
fined mixers"
(explanation
later); the description
is
briel,
since eveMhing always works
in
the same
way.
Now, modellers
are by
nature inventive souls, and the
probability
is high that
somebody
will find he needs a
mixing function which our
programmer,
in
spite of
his
vast experience,
has not thought of beforehand. For this
reason there are the
"
User-detined
mixers"
("
USR-
MlX") which
you
can
"define"
yourself.
This
gives you
the
chance
lo overcome the most exotic
Droblems.
These
user-defined
mixers are discussed in the Jinal
Section.
What
is
"mixing"?
Let's imagine a simple case:
Your model is fitted with camber-changing
flaps or land-
ing flaps. They are
lowered for
the
landing approach,
and thereby
increase the lift coefficient of the wing.
However, one result of this is usually an alteration
in the
pitch
trim of the
model
-
it
becomes
nose-heavy or tail-
heavy.
The
pilot
then has to apply
"up/'
or
"down"
in
order to
keeo the model on an even keel.
This manual
form of
"pitch
trim compensation" can be
automated by
passing
a
proportion
of the
"flap
signal"
to the elevator. Of
course, this
has
to be
in the
correct
direction, and
ot a suitable
magnitude. You don't need
to
worry that this
part
of
the flap signal
"goes
missing";
the electronics
are designed
in
such a
way
that
the full
signal
reaches the flaps, even
when
part
of it is
"bled
off" to
the elevator.
The net result is that the elevator servo
receives
part
ot
the
"flap"
signal
in
addition
to its main
"elevator"
signal.
Fig.29
Now we will
refine the
arrangement
(and
complicate
it).
Your model
is
capable
of tlying smaller-diameter
loops if
the wing
flaps deflect down slightly
when
you
apply
up-
elevator. Once
again the
pilot
could do
it, but we will
remove that task
from him and automate the
process
by
teeding a
proportion
of the elevator signal
to the flap
servo.
The
net result is that the tlap servo
receives
part
of
the
"elevator"
signal in addition to
its main
"flap"
signal.
Fig.30
A
year
or two ago
we might have said this:
"that's
an
elevator/flap
mixer". Please
lorget
that
right now
-
it's
just
too vague to cover lhe
possibilities.
Our example
is
about to become even
more soohisticated.
The model
has suddenly sprouted spoilers,
allowing the
pilot
to
make
it lose height rapidly. In most cases spoilers also
affect the
model's
pitch
trim.
You can
probably
see
what is
coming:
we feed a
propor-
tion oJ the spoiler
signal to the elevator servo; again
in
the
correct
direction and of the correct
magnitude, and
the
pitch
trim compensation
is automatically correct.
The elevator servo
now receives the
following
sig-
nals:
the main
"elevator"
signal
part
ot the
"tlap"
signal
part
of
the
"spoiler"
signal
Fig.
Our earlier
idea of a mixer is now creaking somewhat.
45
And
now the
final touch:
We don't always
want to
fly tight
loops; for
"normal"
fly-
inq it
is
better
if the flaps do
not
deflect
automatically
wf,en the elevator
is
moved. Obvious
solution:
install
a
switch
so
that the
part
of the
elevator signal
that
is Jed
to the
flap servo can
be switched
on and
off.
We
have introduced
a switch
into the signal
line
"eh
evator
to
flap input".
Fig.32
Now
you
can
probably
see how
it all hangs
together:
Each servo
which is to
receive
more than
one single
signal
is
provided
with
an
(imaginary)
"black
box".
The
"6lack
box"
has inputs
for all
the signals
we need
to
pass
to the servo.
But
it has only
one output
-
and that
irrovides
the composite
signal
which is actually
fed to
the servo.
Now
we
provide
an adjustor
for each
input, so
that each
of
the
part-signals
can
be
varied in size.
A
"reversing
device"
is also
fitted for each
signal.
And finally,
where
it is likely
to be
useful,
we fit a switch,
so that
each
part-signal
can be
turned on
and off.
It is this
imaginary
"black
box" that
we call
a mixer.
Now
we will
look at a different
example:
a
V'tail.
First we
will
only
look at one tail
panel
-
one
"half".
In this
case
we need
a
"black
box"
which combines
the
"elevator"
and
"
rudder"
signals.
lt is called
a
V-tail mixer.
In
slightly
more
technical
and abstract
terms:
A V-tail
mixer combines
the
"elevator"
and
"rudder"
signals
and
feeds
the composite
signal
to the servo.
We need
the same
mixer
for the other
half of
the
Vtail.
Of
course,
the
size of the
two signals
is
fully variable'
as
in the Drevious
mixer.
In this case
we
have to
pay
atten-
tion
to the
"prefix",
i.e. the
direction
of rotation
of the
part-signals:
the
"elevator"
part
must work
in the same
direction
for both
halves
of the
tail. The
"rudder"
part
must act
in opposed
directions.
But this
presents
no
oroblem,
as
we can,
of course,
adjust
the direction
of
rotation separately
for each
part-signal.
Even better:
we
do
not
need to
worry any
more about
the
mechanical
linkages
and the
space available:
when
the model
is
comfllete,
we
apply,
for example,
"up
elevator";
if the
elevalor
moves
down,
we simply
reverse
the direction
of
rotation of the
"elevator
part-signal".
The same applies
to the
rudder signals.
Since
the magnitude
and direction
of
each
part-sig-
nal is fully adiustable,
you
can see
that
installation
problems
are a thing
of the
past.
As in this example,
there are
many other
commonly
used
"
mixed
functions",
for which
"
pre-defined" mixers
can
be used.
A
"flaperon"
mixer,
for example,
produces
a composite
signal
for the f laperon
servos
consisting
oJ
the basic
tlap and aileron
functions
(hence
"tlaperon").
lf
vou
have a
model
fitted with
flaperons,
you
again
neäd two such
mixers:
one
for each flaperon
servo.
Commonly
used
mixers
can be
pre-defined. The
part-signals
tor the
tunctions of
a
pre-def
ined
mixer
are
already
laid down.
Each
mixer of this
type
is
given
a
name
which
describes
its use clearly.
Such
pre-defined mixers are available
in an
"ad-
equatC"
number
in
your
transmitter,
and cater
for all
the
most commonly
used
applications'
You will
find mixers
for:
V{ail,
"V-tail
+", flaperons,
"elevator
+", snapJlaps,
delta,
"aileron
brakes
(crow)",
"Quadro".
lf at this
point
the
operation
of any
one of these
mixers
is
not clear
Jrom
its title, don't
worry.
They are all
explained
in lull at a
later stage.
You can
implement
each
of these
mixers
(i.e.
install the black
box
in front of
a servo)
as often
as
you
like.
The actual
limit is
nine
times,
since
the system
ls
"only"
able
to control
9 ser-
vos. That
has to be
the definitive
answer
to the
oft-
posed question
"
how many
mixers?"
!
The answer
is not what
you
might
think, and
certainly
not I
mixers.
lt is I
mixer systems
with
10 different
transmitter
controls
to
4 di{ferent
inputs,
i.e. 10-
possibili-
ties
per
servo!
How to use
the
pre-defined mixers
The
use oJ
the
pre-defined,
"
ready-made"
mixers
is
based
on
the same
scheme
that
you
have already
come
to
know:
first assign,
then
adiust.
Once again
the
transmitter
"oJfers"
options
in the
form oJ menus.
From
what
we have
iust
said
it
should
be
clear
that
mixers
are assigned
to the servos.
First a simple
example:
the V-tail
Here we
will suppose
that
you
have set
up
memory 03
for a
model
named
"TEST",
and
assigned
the controls
like
this:
"Transmitter
control
B
=
ELEVATOR"
and
"Transmitter
control
C
=
RUDDER".
Servos
2 and
3 are
to ooerate
the Vlail.
46
First the
mixer is assigned
to
the servos:
Move to
the
"Assign
servos"
menu.
There
you
first select
servo
No.2
in the usual
way.
Now
"activate"
the select
function
field with the
Z
key.
Leaf through
with the
E
key.
The
lunctions with
which
vou
are bv
now
familiar
from the
normal assigning
pro-
öedure
afpear
one by
one.
After
"FIXED
VALUE" and
for the
full list.
After
"ELEVATOR
+" comes
"V-TAIU'.
This is the
mixer
we want.
(After
this comes
the
"V-
TAIL+
"
mixer, which
can do
even
more, but
we will
come
to that
in a moment).
You will
see
this:
H55Irjt.l SEFlr,IÜ
I
I
tJ-TFll
L r
Press the
[!
key, select servo No. 3 and repeat the
whole
thing
for
this servo.
The
assignment
process
is
now
complete.
You have now
"
informed"
your
transmitter that:
Servo
No. 2
operates
V-TAIL,
and Servo No. 3 operates
V-TAIL.
It
also
knows
that
it is
to
place
the appropriate mixer
betore each of the two servos. In more
abstract terms:
you
have
assigned servos 2 and 3 to the
"V-Tail
higher
mixed function".
Leave the menu in the
usual
way.
Now we come to setting
up
the mixer.
Move to the
"
Servo adiustment" menu. Press the
Z
key to
select
the sub- menu
"TRAVEL
+
REVERSE".
Select servo
No. 2 in
the usual
wav
You will see this:
rSEF:.
r:
r.r-19
i '_
r+ I
rittjt:.:
Elt' ELEtltlr
Press
the
\l
key
and adjust the lhrow to the one side
(stick
back) and then the other side
(stick
forward),
just
as if setting up
in
the
normal way.
There is no reason in
this case why
you
should set unequal movements, so
set both
to, say, 400/o.
lf
you
have an actual model to hand while
you
carry
out
this
practice procedure,
check at this
point
that
"up"
on
the stick makes the elevator rise. lf this is not the case,
press
the
El
key, and it will be reversed.
Note:
lf
you
set mixing
ratios
which add up to less than 1000/0,
then
the mixer will operate in a
"
lineat" fashion, and
the control signals
will never
be
restricted. You
could,
on the
other hand, leave both inputs at, say, 1000/0. In
such a case,
if
you
apply elevator or
rudder
one at a
time,
you
will
have full
travel available.
However,
as
soon as the sum of the two
inouts
for either control sur-
face exceeds 1000/0, i.e. when a lot of elevator and
rud-
der are applied simultaneously, the movement will be
restricted, as the servo and the control surface cannot
move to more than 1000/o of maximum. The etfect
is
aerodynamic
asymmetry which can be disturbing.
"
Linear" mixing
(no
more than 1000/o) is the most
elegant
solution, but in
practice
a setting
part-way
between
the two extremes has
proved
a very effective
comoromise.
Now to the rudder
input.
Press the
Z
key, then
El.
"ln-
put:
ELEVATOR" is now replaced
by
"Part:
RUDDER".
You will see this:
r5EFj.
rr
r.r.
THIL
\+ I
t:Jtit:.j
[:+ FIU[r[rEr
Press the
Sl
key again, then set the
"
ruddet" input for
both directions of
rotation; in
our example 600/0 for each
side.
Here
again, check that
the
control surfaces
move
in the correct direction
(if you
have a model handy).
Reverse the function, if necessary with the
E
key.
We hope
you
didn't Jind that all too confusing. Never
mind
-
you
can
repeat
the
whole
operation
now for
servo No. 3!
Note:
Bear in mind that the travel inputs for the mixers
can be
switched ON/OFF or assigned to a
physical
switch.
lf
you
are
not
sure how to do this
please
refer back to
page
30.
And now a more complex
example
At
the start of this Section
we
discussed a model which
featured
pitch
trim compensation for camber-changing
flaps
and spoilers, and elevator to
flap mixing.
We will assume that transmitter
control
B has
been
assigned
to
the
"elevator"
function,
control D to the
"spoiler"
tunction and control F to the
"flap"
function.
The following
servo assignments have also been made:
Servo No. 2: elevator
Servo
No. 4:
spoilers
Servo No. 6: camber-changing flaps
Here we
come to another special
feature
which,
although
it has nothing
to do with mixing, is important in
an indirect
sense.
We will assume that the
"basic
position" (spoilers
closed) of
control
D is
"forward";to
extend the spoilers
the stick is
pulled
right back.
At the
basic
position
a
very large
signal
is
already
present
-
namely full travel forwards.
Of
this a certain
proportion
would reach the elevator, and then would
need to be
"compensated
away" by some means.
The
transmitter offers a better alternative,
namely
the
"
Normpos"
(Normal
Position)
control option.
lf
you
have not
yet
tackled this feature,
you
should do it now;
otherwise
you
will encounter
problems
in the next
sec-
tion. Please reler to
page
37.
You must
set this option to
"forurards"
(forward
arrow
in
the display).
Assuming,
that
is,
that
your
spoilers are
retracted with the
stick
forward!
This action comoensates for the undesired basic mixino
inout
before
it räaches the mixer. lt has no eflect
at
on the signal to the spoiler servo itself.
From now
on take care that control C
is
set
to
one
or
other of
its
end-points
for
all
your
adjustments.
Alterna-
tively,
you
could switch the
"SPOILER"
input
off
when
adjusting the elevator, as described above.
But enough of the
preliminaries.
First
step,
as always: assigning:
Move to the
"Assign
servos"
menu with
the
key
sequence
El El [l N
.
For servo No. 4
(spoilers)
everything is clear; there is no
mixing. So,
iust
as with
"normal"
assignment, first
select servo
No. 4,
then assign
"SPOILER"
to
it.
Now to the elevator.
Select servo
No. 2,
then
press
the
Z
key; the
control
tunction field starts flashing. Leaf through with the
E
key.
Once again the
lamiliar
"list
of options" appears.
After
"FIXED
VALUE"
and
"
ELEVA'IOR+
":
47
1155Iril..l
5EFitlu
i
I
Tr_r
ELEtl.
+
r
This
is the mixer
that we need.
(lt
is described
in detail
in the
preamble
to the detail
description
of mixers
which
follows.)
That's äll
there
is to it; flap servo
next:
Select
servo
No. 6, then select
the servo
function tield
with the
Z
key. Leaf through
again with the
El
key.
For an unmixed
flap function
you
would now select
"FLAP";
because
of the
mixer, however,
you
have to
con'
tinue
leafing through
until
'SNAPFLAP"
appears:
the
name of
the mixer
which
produces
the
desired
mixing
effect:
II:,5IIJH
5EH[.JÜ
E
1
TI:I
SHHFFLI-IF^T
Now to
the setting-up
process.
Move
to the
"Servo
adjustment"
menu.
Servo
No. 4 is the
first
one
to adjust.
There is not
much to
say about
it: set
the direction of
rotation and the
centre
point (if
necessary)
in the usual
way.
The
flap
servo
(No.
6) comes
next. In this case
we
should
really call
it the snapJlap
servo,
because
we have
assigned
the SNAPFLAP
function to
it. Hair-splitting?
Well, that's
how
your
transmitter
sees
it.
Select
servo No. 6.
You see this:
r:-1EF:.
i:
l.J-Ttl
l L
t
+Itli:
F't' FLHF
In the second
line
you
will see
"FLAP"
on the right. So
we will set up
this
input first.
Release
the
input value
field with the
S
key
(value
flashes). Check
whether the
direction of servo
rotation
is
correct.
lf not,
press
the
E
key.
But the values
them-
selves?
We cannot
tell
you
exactly
what they should
be,
as this depends
on
your
model, and
in
particular
on the
length of
the actuating
arms on lhe servo
and the
control
surfaces.
lt is best
to measure
the result on
the flaps
themselves;
for
camber-changing
flaps a
good
starting
ooint
would
be around 5
-
10 degrees
up and
15
-
20
degrees
down. Set
the slider to
the one end-point
and
then
the other,
and use the
E
and
El
keys to set the
0/o
vatues.
Now to the
"elevator"
inout.
Press the
!
key, then the
El
key. With
ELEVATOR
flash-
ing, the display
will
look like this:
r5EFl.
E,: :;HHFFLIIF
r+ 1riifi:t
Ert ELEt.Jl.lr
Activate the
input
value tield with the
!
key once
more.
Check
the
direction of
servo
rotation; for snapjlaps
the
elevator
must move
in opposition
to the flaps,
i.e. up-el-
evator
with downJlap.
ls that
how it is?
lf not, reverse
it
with the
E
key. Apply
"full
up" at the
elevator stick,
and
set
the desired
flap deflection
with the
El
or
E
keys.
Repeat the
process
for
"full
down" elevator.
A
good
start-
ing
point
for both sides
would be around
5
-
10 degrees
flap detlection;
you
will be able
to find the optimum
set-
tings
later on, during
test-flying.
4a
Do
you
remember that
we wanted
to make
the eleva'
tor
---
f lap mixing switchablet
That comes
next.
You can
-
or
rather, must
-
tell the
transmitter
which
switch
is to carry oul
this task
(you
have to
do this
because
your
PROFI
mc 3010 sets
virtually
no restrictions
on
what
you
can and
cannot do)
Now
move to the SWITCH
menu,
by
pressing
the key
sequence
EIZ Z
from the basic display.
Press the
0l
key.
Iap the
El
key
repeatedly until
"55+"
appears
and
flashes. The arrow shows
that
the switch
must be
pushed
in that direction
to switch
it ON, i.e. the
coupling
is then effective.
lf
you
want to reverse
this,
press
the
E
key, and
the
job
is
done.
You
are
finished
with the snapJlap
servo.
Now to the
elevator
(more
accurately:
ELEVATOR+)
servo,
in our
case
No. 2.
First
move to the
TRAVEL & REVERSE
menu.
Select servo
No.
2 with the
Z
and
El
keys.
The
display
will look
like
this:
rtEF:.
::
ELETJ.
+
L+ 1
|i1fi:t
Et ELEtJHT
Input:
"ELEVATOR"
is already there,
so
we will set that up
first. Release
the input
value field with
the
!
key, then
check
the direction of
rotation;
reverse it
if necessary
Then set the travel
itself on both
sides: 900/o
would be a
usetul starting
point.
The
"SPOILER"
and
"FLAP"
inputs are
adjusted
next,
but we don't
need to describe
the adjustment
procedure
in detail again.
In both cases
it is all
"business
as usual":
select the
input, set the
value tor both sides.
Reverse
the
tunction
if necessary
The method
of making the
inputs
switchable
has already been
described
for the
SNAPFLAP
mixed
function.
One
final thing
you
might
like to try out
in addition to
the
last example
(this
has nothing to do
with mixers):
Try
out
the transmitter
control option
"
Fixed
Value" for the
flap function
(see
page
36).
You will see that
every aspect
of the adjustments
you
have made
regarding the slider
control still
functions
if
you
"ovenide"
the slider
position
with a switch.
Our
tip:
Practise
"adiusting
inputs" until
you
are
confident
with the
procedure.
Later on,
at the
flying
site,
you
will also need to
know
what to do, so that
you
can
make sense of the
test-flying
process.
lt is
not always
quite
as
quiet
and calm out
there on
the
tlying strip
as it
is in
your
workshop; and
in
such
"mild
stress situations"
you
can easily
make an
error
-
unless
you
are
contident of
what
you
are
doing,
that is.
The
same
applies
if
you
use
the
"ready-made
lists"
supplied
with the
transmitter,
without assigning
any-
thihg
yourself.
lt is almost
impossible
to use any of
the
mixers unless
you
know how to set
and adiust
input values.
Never attempt
to adiust
anything
trom the
keypad
when
you
are
flying a
model. Instead
use the
oigi-
Adiustor,
which is always switched
"in
parallel"
with
the
E
and
El
keys,
when it makes sense
to use
it.
The basic
rule
is
this:
keep the
keypad
flap
shut
whlle
you
are
flying!
Description of the
pre-defined,
"ready-made"
mixers
Now that
you
have
become
familiar with the way the
mixers are assigned and adjusted,
here is
a
list
of
the
pre-defined
mixers in the same sequence as they are
offered by the transmitter
when
you
"leat
through" the
oDIrons.
With all
mixers
the stick unit trim sliders are automati-
cally
included where it makes most sense, or where
it is
standard oractice.
You
don't
need
to concern vourself
with them at all.
Examoles:
For a
"V-tail"
the elevator trim
works in
the usual
way;
for
"snap-flaps"
it does not.
For each
mixing input
the size and the
pretix (rotary
sense
of the servo)
can be adjusted. The inputs can be switched
on and off wherever that is of oractical advantaoe.
You can assign each mixer as often as
your
application
demands
it.
Examole:
You must use the
"Quadro"
mixer at least
four
times;
less than that
number means
that
it is no longer a
"Quadro"
mixer. However, there is no reason why
you
should not use it six times if
your
model has
three
wing
control surfaces
on
each side.
One more time
-
just
to remind
you:
You can set any
input
lo
"
zerc"
and
then
disregard
it
altogether. This may make a
particular
mixer
suitable
for a different, but similar
purpose.
Examole:
With the
"Quadro"
mixer
you
could set the
"elevator"
input to
zero,
and
you
then
have
a
mixer which involves
"flaps"
and
"ailerons"
only.
Mixers
for fixed-wing
The
"ELEVATOR+"
mixer
lnouts:
Elevator
Sooiler
FlaD
models
The mixer
is
usually assigned as
follows:
Elevator servo
Main application:
Standard
models
with
camber-changing
or landing
flaos and/or sDoilers.
The
"V-TAlf
mixer
lnDuts: Elevator
Rudder
The
mixer is
usually
assigned as follows:
V-tail servos
Main application:
Model aircraft
with V-tails
The
"V-TAIL+
"
mixer
Inputs:
Elevator
Rudder
Spoiler
Flap
The mixer is usually assigned as
follows:
V-tail servos
Main application:
Models with V-tail and/or spoilers and/or
camber-chang-
ing or landing flaps.
The
"aileron
brake"
(Crow)
mixer
lnouts:
Aileron
Flap
Sooiler
Elevator
The mixer is usually assigned as
follows:
Flap
and aileron servos. Usually
4 servos.
Main application:
Models in which the
"Crow"
configuration
is to
be used
as an aid to flight
path
control
in
certain
llight
situations
(descent,
landing approach). Can also be used
for
pure
"aileron
brakes".
The
"SNAPFLAP"
mixer
Inputs: Flap
,an
Elevator
etevalor
The mixer is usually assigned as lollows:
Flao
servos
Main application:
F3A class aerobatic
models for
"souare"
manoeuvres
The
"QUADRO"
mixer
lnouts:
Aileron
aileron
Flap
Elevator
The mixer is usually assigned as follows:
Flao and aileron servos
Main application:
Gliders
with
"Quadro"
flap conliguration
(flaps
support
ailerons,
ailerons support flaps)
The
"
DELTA' mixer
lnDuts: Aileron
Elevator
The mixer is usually assigned as follows:
servos
(combination
ailerons/elevators)
Main application:
delta model aircraft and
flying wings.
etevalor
sporler
flap
atleron
sporler
elevalor
elevator
ruooer
sporler
flap
elevator
The
"FLAPERON"
mixer
Inputs:
Aileron
aleron
Flap
flap
The mixer
is
usually assigned as
lollows:
Flaperon servos
Main application:
Models
with f laperons
(combination
flap
i ailerons)
49
Mixers
for
model
helicopters
The
"TAIL
ROTOR"
mixer
Inputs:
Collective
pitch
Yaw
Fixed
value
The mixer
is usually assigned
as
follows:
Tail rotor servo
Main application:
Model
helcopters
with main
rotor torque
compensation
via tail
rotor
The
"HEIM
HEAD" mixer
Inputs:
Collective
pitch
Roll
The mixer
is usually assigned
as
follows:
Swashplate
actuation
servos
Main application:
Model
helicopters
with Heim-type
swashplate
linkage,
or similar
The
"HEAD-MIX"
mixer
Inputs: Collective
pitch
Roll
Pitch-axis
Geometry
Phase
The mixer
is usually
assigned
as follows:
Swasholate
control
servos
Main
application:
Model
helicopters
with
"Collective
Pitch
Mixing"
swash-
plate
linkage
collective
pitch
yaw-axis
fixed value
collective
pitch
roll-axis
The', DYNAMIC-THROTTLE',
MiXCT
lnputs:
Throttle
Roll
Pitch-axis
Yaw
throttle
roll-axis
pitch-axis
yaw-axis
throttle
servo
The mixer
is usually assigned
as
tollows:
"Throttle"
servo
Main application:
All
model helicopters
in
which throttle
is not controlled
directly
by the
pilot,
but
is controlled
indirectly
accord'
ing to the
power
absorption
of the
main and
tail rotors.
SDecial
feature:
The
"roll", "pitch-axis/r,
and
"yaw"
inputs are
mixed
"without
prefixes",
as
the
power
requirement
of
the
main and
tail rotors
rises from
zerc
"on
both
sides".
The
"FLARE"
mixer
Inputs: Pitch-axis
Collective oitch
geometry
collective
pitch
rolFaxis
pitch-axis
phase
The
mixer is usually
assigned
as follows:
Pitch-axis servo
Main application:
Helicopters
with separate
pitch-axis
servo
lueter,
"Shuttle"),it
"
tlarc"
mixing
is
desired.
pitch-axis
collective
pitch
pitch-axas
servo
(e.9.
Sch-
The freely
definable
mixers
("USR-MlX"
mixers)
In
contrast
to the
"pre-defined"
mixers discussed
in the
Drevious
Section,
the
user-definable
mixers
give
you
the
chance
to select
precisely
the mixing
inputs
you
require.
This feature
caters
for all
possible
applications
for which
no
pre-defined
mixers are
provided.
Once
they
have been
"defined",
these
mixers can
be
used
exactly
like the
"pre-defined"
mixers.
This
means
that they
are assigned
and
adjusted
in
exactly
the same
way. And
in exactly
the same
way,
switches
are
provided
for turning
individual
inputs
on
and
off.
These
mixers
give you
total
freedom!
Note:
In
practice,
the
term
"defining
mixers"
means
that
you
select:
Input
1
controls
(say)
aileron
Input 2 controls
(say
eleva-
tor
That
is all
you
need to do
to define a
delta
mixer.
You
can
now assign
the mixer
in the standard
way. However,
when
you
try out
the system,
you
will discover:
No trims!
Right
then, back
to defining
the USR-MIX
mixer, release
the
input
field with the
E
key, and add
the
trim.
E.G.
Inout
1
50
1. AIL +T
And the
result?
Nothing!
Has the transmitter
gone
wrong?
No, there's
nothing
wrong:
lirst
you
must re-assign
the
modified
USR-mixer.
Move
to the servo
assignment
menu, select
the
appropriate
servo,
and activate
the
input
field. The
legend USR-MIX
1 flashes
-
now the
altered
USR
mixer
is
active.
You may
lind this difficult
or complex,
but
bear
with us;
this
"trap"
in Jact offers
immense
possibilities.
lf
you
are
really clever,
you
will already
have
realised
the
potential:
Since
we
have to
re-activate the
mixer each
time,
we
can
alter the
USR
mixer definition between
each
servo
assignment
(servo
1, 2, 3 etc.),
so that each
of the
9 ser'
vos has
its own USR
mrxer. But
-
of course
-
there
has
to be
a drawback.
The USR
mixers
can indeed
all be diflerent,
but
they all
have the
same
name, e.g. USR-MIX
1.
Al this
point
we
will come back
to the
game
we
played
before,
in
answering
your
friends'
question:
"My
transmitter
has 6
mixers; and
yours?"
A
case
for a mixer
-
a USR-MIX
mixer.
Second
example:
in a model boat
with
2 motors and
2
screws
the
motors
are required
to support
the
rudder.
When
"right
rudder" is applied,
the
left motor
is to be
fed
with more
current,
and the
right one
less; and
the
other
way round
when
"left
rudder"
is
applied.
Here
we
need tvvo
mixers ol the
same
type for
the
inouts
"
rudder"
and
"
motor":
Independent
of the
13 ready-made
mixer systems,
each
of
which
you
can apply
I times,
you
now have
the USR
mixers.
These can
be assigned
up to
1.0 different
inputs
for all
four channels.
That means:
10"
possible
mixers
oer
servol
Sample
applications:
As
the
first example,
imagine
an electric-powered
model aircraft.
lmagine also
that it
has the unpleasant
habit of
becoming
more and
more tail'heavy,
the
more
the
"throttle"
is opened
(the
more
power
is ted to the
motor). Quite
why this
occurs
we don't
need to waste
time
thinking
about:
perhaps
the modeller
just
wanted
an easy
life, or
maybe
he made a
mistake at
the build-
ing board.
Now,
wouldn't
it
be
nice
if we could
mix down'elevator
in with
the
"throttle"
automatically,
so
that more
"down"
was aDDlied
as the
throttle
was opened.
We would
then
need a
"motor"
and
"elevator"
mixer.
Ot the
four
possible
inputs
we need only
2: one
jor
"MOTOR',
the
other
for
"ELEVATOR".
In line 1
(Number
and
"name"
oJ the
mixer)
you
will see
"USR-MlX1";
i.e.
there
is nothing to
be done
here.
Now we will
"define"
the
inputs
in turn:
in line 1
you
will
see
"lNP1",
which
is the first
input;
we
can
leave
it as
it
is.
Press
the
Z
key; and
the
"type
of input"
=
control
function can be
entered.
Leaf through
with the
E
key
until
"MOTOR"
appears.
That's
it done.
Now to
the second
input.
Press the
!
key,
followed by
El.
"lNP1"
turns
into
"lNP.2".
Press the
Z
key again,
then
leaf through
with the
El
key until
"
ELEVATOR"
appears:
rl_l5F:-t,lI
l':1
i
+T+F:]
r I f iF
. i: ELEr,.rH
I
Now
you
really
are
finished.
Inputs 3 and
4 are not
It is always
possible
that there
could be
something
undesirable
left
here from an
earlier
mixer definition,
so
we ought
to have a
look, to be
on the safe
side:
Select
input 3
as discussed
above.
ll
you
see
(Nothing)
there,
move on
immediately
to
input No.
4; otherwise
leaf through
with the
E
key until
appears.
Repeat
the
process
with input
4.
This
really does
complete
the task.
Leave the
menu
in
the usual
way
with the
@
key.
At this
point
a
little
"operating
convenience"
is built
in:
you
are taken
immediately
to
the
"Assign
sewos"
menu,
where
you
can
carry out
this
process.
lf
you
do
not wish
to do this,
just
press
@
again.
The result
of
your
work, in diagrammatic
form:
n#liif_,if
"",".
ffiiilr8lil
To assign
this
mixer to
the elevator
servo,
leal through
until vou see
"Servo
No.
.
controls
USR-Mlxl'.
'
I
number
ot seNo
lf
you
want to adiust
this servo,
you
must then,
as
with
thö other
mixers,
adjust both
inputs
"MOTOR"
and
"EL-
EVATOR".
The
second
example
in abbreviated
form:
For this
you
use
USR mixer
2.
Assign
"MO'rOR"
to
input
1;
"
RUDDER"
to
input 2.
ft
you
assign
'MOf
-2'
to
the 3rd
input, then
a further
relinement
is automatically
available.
Why
not try and
work
out
what it is?
(clue:
bear
in
mind that
you
can
later switch oft
or set
inputs to
zero).
Input4
is again set
to
(Nothing).
This mixer
in diagrammatic
form:
elevator
+
trim
molor
etevalor
servo
motor
controller
R.H. motor
motor controller
L.H.
motor
motor
rudder
+
trim
motor
rudder
+
trim
lf the
two
molors
have already
been set
for separate
control
from
the transmitter,
using
the assignments
'MOTOR"
and
"
MOTOR-2",
then
the solution
can
be
even
more sophisticated,
but
we won't
go
into that
here.
How
to
"define"
the mixer
Every definable
mixer
has tour
inputs.
To define
the
mixei,
we need
to tell the
transmitter
which control
func-
tions
it is to send
to these
inputs.
That
is what
we mean
by
"defining".
Naturally,
this
is done by
means
of a
menu, which
you
will
find
in the
"bottom
right-hand
corner"
of
the
"As'
signing"
menu.
Starting
from the
Status display,
more to
the
"Assign-
ing"
menu with
the key sequence @ Z N
;
then select
"USR-MlX"
with the
Z
key.
You will see
this display:
rutFt-f'lI
iil
i
+T+E:i
rIl'.|F.1:
rj".
r
Now
we
will
detine
the
mixer
for the
first example.
This will be
USR
mixer 1.
motor
ruooet
molor
(motor
controller)
motor 2
nothing
cl
And
now
one small,
but
very important difference:
What
happens to the trims?
With many mixers
it is necessary to include the
trim
slider
positions
with the
"pure
stick signal".
For
exam-
ple,
that applies
to a V-tail, otherwise
it would not be
oossible
to trim the elevators
and rudder.
The
same
also
applies to
the elevator control of a
llying wing
model.
On the
other hand there are
mixers in which the
posi-
tion of the trim sliders should
not be included.
Example:
"snapjlaps"
on an aerobatic
model. In this case
the
wing control surfaces
should not deflect
when the
elevator
trim slider
is
shifted;
flap movement is only
required when
you
"control"
the elevator.
It depends
theretore on
your particular
application,
whether
you
want the
mixing inputs with or without
trims, and
this applies equally to the USR
mixers.
You
can
choose this too:
We will return to
the first
example
we discussed
here.
We had
this display:
ru:,Ft-fl
I iiI
{:+T+F:i
r I l'lF.
r: ELEr"rH
r
Press the
Z
key
again;
"ELEVATOR"
flashes.
lf
you
now
press
the
E
key,
"
+T" will appear
This means
"with
trim", and
indicates that the
tion is now
mixed in with the ELEVATOR
input:
rU:;Fj-l'1
I :'i I
{: +T+F:
i
r I I'lF. :: ELEr-rH+Tr
lf
you press
the
El
key again,
"+T"
disappears again,
and the
mixing occurs
"without
trims".
One last time:
Please bear
in mind
(as
already
described above)
that
you
must
re-assign the USR-Mixers every time
you
alter their definition,
otherwise the changes
will
not take eftect.
next
to
it.
trim
posF
Over the course
of its existence the
model helicopter
has developed
into
a sophisticated
and demanding
machine.
The
demands
these machines
make
on
the
radio control
system are no
less
comprehensive.
The
PROFI mc 3010, with its
vast flexibility, is more than a
match
for all these requirements;
thanks in in
particular
to the specialised
"helicopter
mixers" and the user-de-
fined
mixers, which can be used to
fulfil
almost
any con-
ceivable
need. Experts
will
also be
delighted to exploit
the
possibility
of
"switching
memories
in flight"
(see
page
68).
lf
you
already
have
some
experience with choppers
the
lollowing Section
will
probably present
no
problem.
ll
you
are a beginner
to the world oJ the
whirling rotor,
we strongly advise
you
to read and study
modelling
magazines
and specialist books
to complement the
information
in this
manual.
That is not because
the PROFI
mc
3010
is complicated,
but because
helicopters are
inherently complex.
And
because
it
is not
possible
to start with
2
or 3
functions,
as
with a
fixed-wing model. lt is far outside
the scope of
this
manual to
go
into
the basics
and finer
points
of
heli-
copter
control systems, as
they are by
no means as
easy
to understand
nor as easy to
imagine as those of
tixed-wing
models. Some of the commonly
used terms
are explained
in
this section
where necessary; and
you
will
find
some
further explanations under
"Some
heli-
copter
terms" on
page
76.
In
this Section
we start from the assumption
that
you
are
already familiar with the
way the transmitter works,
so that
we
can concentrate
on the characteristics oJ the
helicopter.
Even if
you
consider
yourself
an expert and a
helicopter
specialist
you
should
at least carry out a
few
"dry
runs"
with
the
fixed wing examples, so that
you
become
famiF
iar with the way the transmitter
works.
As
a
minimum,
you
should
teel
at
home with the
method of finding
your
way
around
the menus, and
with
selecting,
correlating and adjusting
servos and trans-
mitter controls.
Basically the
"helicopter"
transmitter is operated
in the
same
way
as
for a fixed-wing model.
Everything that we
have said up to now on
working with memories, mixers
and so on, applies
in f
ull
to the helicopter transmitter.
However, there
is
one
fundamental difference: every
modern model
helicopter is tlown with at
least
one
mixer right
from
the start, and
most oJ them
feature
sev-
eral mixers.
The
"collective
Ditch/throttle
curve"
is
another
feature which is
peculiar
to the
helicopter
world.
But now: down to business.
52
The assignment
process
for
helicopters
lf we disregard the early,
very
simple
helicopters, which
managed without collective
pitch,
the model helicopter
requires at least five
primary
control
functions:
1.
Collective oitch
2. Pitch-axis
(fixed
wing:
elevator)
3. RolFaxis
(fixed
wing: aileron)
4. Yaw-axis
(tail
rotor
-
fixed wing: rudder)
5.
Throttle;
usually
linked
to and derived
from
col-
lective
oitch
Commonly used auxiliary functions:
6. Gyro suppression
and
7. Mixture adjustment for the motor.
Assigning the
"transmitter
control
"
end
of the system
At
the
transmitter end the four main control f unctions:
COLLECIIVE
PITCH, PITCH-AXIS, ROLL and YAW
have to be assigned to the two transmitter sticks
in the
usuar
way.
As the
"THROTTLE"
function
is
controlled
in
two
ways
-
partly
via a derived signal from
"COLLECrIVE
PITCH" and
partly
via a separate control
(more
details
later)
-
a transmitter control
must
also be assigned to
it;
usually one ol the
two
sliders.
The other slider
is
used
for mixture
adjustment.
Start by
moving to the
"Assign
transmitter controls"
menu as described before. Assign the transmitter con-
trols
A
-
D to the control Junctions COLLECf IVE
PITCH,
ROLL, PITCH and YAW using the arrangement
you
pre-
fer.
Assign slider E or
F
to
"THROTTLE";
then
the remain-
ing slider
to
"
MIXTURE".
lf
you
are using a
gyro
which
can be controlled
trom the
transmitter, a
further transmitter control needs to be
assigned to
it; for
example
one of the
"switched
chan-
nels"
H; in
the
transmitter's language: transmitter con-
trol H
=
GYRO.
lf
you
do not need
mixture
adjustment,
you
could
assign
one of the sliders to the
gyro.
Assigning at the
"servo
end"
Here
things
get
a little more complex. But let's do things
in the
right
order!
In
the
model there are three
groups
of control functions:
1. The tail rotor
(yaw)
control system,
including
gyro
suppression
2.
Throttle
control system
including mixture
adiustment
3. Swashplate
(main
rotor) control
system.
No helicopter can manage without this:
The tail rotor control system
Move to the
"Assign
servos" menu. Select in the usual
way the desired servo number, and activate the servo
f unction field in line 2 with the
Z
key.
"
Leaf through" with the
E
key
until
"TAILROT."
appears:
H5:,Iriil 5EF;r.Jü I
I
TI:I TI]
I LEL-'IT. ^T
In our example servo No. 3 is now assigned to tail rotor
control. This automatically makes available the essen-
tial mixer which
passes part
of the collective
pitch
sig-
nal to the tail
rotor
servo.
All
you
need
to do
later is
set
the level of the two inputs.
lmportant:
Be
sure to assign
"TAIL
ROTOR". lf
you
assign
"YAW"
instead,
you
will have the normal stick
func-
tion, but
not
the collective
pitch
mixing
-
i.e. no
static
tail rotor compensation!
Set up
gyro
suppression
in the same way:
As the
"sensitivity"
input of the
gyro
is
connected to the
receiver in the same way as a servo, the
"formal"
des-
ignation
here is:
"
Servo
No. ..
controls GYRO".
In
our example
the
gyro
is connected to receiver output 6.
So:
press
the
S
key and select servo No. 6. Press
Z
and leaf through until
"GYRO"
appears:
r-r:,:,I
riH
5EF:Url ü
I
Tr:r tiirFtür
Leave the menu as usual; that's it
-
done!
The throttle control system
First the
mixture adiustment
At the
"Assign
servos" menu select, say, servo
No. 7;
then
press
the
Z
key and select
"MIXTURE":
t1:,5IüH sEFlr,lr_t
T
I
I'II !{TUFIE/
Now the
"throttle"
servo.
First
we
select
the
appropriate
servo again; in our case
No. 4.
Now
instead of the simple
"THROTTLE"
function as on
a
fixed-wing aircraft, we are otfered the
mixed function
"DYN.-THROT."
(dynamic
throttle).
This mixed tunction
allows
you
to
"switch
in"
part
of the ROLL, PITCH and
YAW control signals
to the throttle signal. This is desir-
able because every control
movement requires extra
power
from the motor. lf
you
do not want to use this
fea-
ture. the ROLL. PITCH and YAW inouts
will
be set to
zeto.
So:
press
the
tr
key, then leai through with the
E
key
until vou see
"
DYN.-THROT.":
t:t5!;itjH :,EF:t.t[t 4
r
T[t ['tr't'], THF:. r
That's all there
is
to
it here,
too.
lncidentally: if
you
don't hold with such
refinements,
you
can always use the simple
"THROTTLE'
lunction.
In that case the mixing arrangements simply do
not
appty.
The swashplate control
system
Here
we
can't
avoid
getting
a
little deeper
into the tech-
nology,
as there are several
different rotor
head control
systems,
or designs,
which differ
widely from each
other.
In fact they all do the same
job:
they
provide
con-
trol of collective
pitch,
roll-axis and
pitch-axis.
However,
the
different systems
make
quite
different
demands on
the
number of servos
and how they are used.
For this
reason we
present
here
a brief
description
of the
three most important systems,
and
the
assignments
required
for
each:
1. The
"classical"
fixed swashplate
move along
the axis of the
rotor shatt;
it can only tilt.
Collective
pitch
control
is
via
a oushrod
which runs
inside the
hollow rotor
shaft,
or in a
groove
in the
rotor shaft. Collective
and
cyclic
pitch
are
mixed
mechanically,
"
higher
up",
at the
rotor.
The
swash-
plate
is controlled by two
servos,
set at 90 degrees
to each other.
Fio.33
There are therefore
three servos
for
collective
pitch,
roll-
axis and
pitch-
axis,
which have entirely separale
func-
tions.
Servo
No. 1 controls
ROLL-axis
Servo
No. 2 controls
PITCH-axis
Servo
No. 5 controls COLLECTIVE
PITCH
lf
you
wish,
you
can mix in the
pitch-axis
input to collec-
tive
pitch
at a later stage,
if
you
find it necessary
(tor
the
transition
from cruise
to hoveo. To achieve
this, assign
"
FLARE" to the Ditch-axis
servo.
Please
note that if
you
change the
assignment, all
the
previous pitch-axis
servo adjustments
will be lost.
2. The
"CPM"
swashplate
CPM
stands
tor
"Collective
Pitch Mixing".
This type of
linkage
is to some extent the
opposite of the
fixed
swashDlate.
In this case
the swashplate
is Jree to move
along
the rotor shaft
in the axial direction.
Moving it axi-
ally
produces
collective
pitch
control; tilting
it
produces
cyclic
pitch
control.
Three servos
are again
required, but in this case
all
three act on
the swashplate.
This arrangement
is known
as a 3-point
linkage.
However, it is
possible
to use more
servos
to control
the swashplate.
A 4-point
linkage
presents
no
problem
to the transmitter.
You could even
"distribute"
5 or
more servos around
the
rotor head, should a
helicopter
with these features
ever
come onto the
market.
There are
two different
methods of arranging
these
three servos:
the
"go-degree
arrangement"
and the
"120-degree
arrangement"
:
The
90-degree
arrangement
is the simpler
one.
All three servos
must tirst be assigned
an equal
part
of
the ooLLECTIVE
PITCH signal;
the result
is that the
swashDlate
rises and
falls
evenlv
when the collective
54
Fig.34
pitch
control
is operated. For roll control
only the two
outer servos are operated,
in this case
in opposite
directions.
Finally the central
servo alone
provides
pitch-axis
control.
The 120-degree arrangement distributes
the
loads to
the servos
more evenly.
For collective
pitch
control all three servos
again
receive an equal
part
of the COLLECTIVE
PITCH sig-
nal. For roll control, once again,
only the two outer ser-
vos are operated,
in opposite directions.
For
pitch-axis
control.
however. all three servos
must work: the two
outer
ones work together, but
in the opposite direction
to the central one.
Even this is not the end of
the matter: the servo
move-
ments must be different.
The two outer servos,
when
required to
produce
a
pitch-axis
movement, deflect by
the same amount.
The central one
has to move twice as
far.
The same
"HEAD-MIX"
mixer
is
used
for controlling
the servos
in both versions ot
the CPM rotor
head:
geometry
collective
pitch
roll-axis
pilch-axis
phase
This mixer offers
the facility to
feed
adjustable
COLLEC-
TIVE
PITCH, PITCH-AXIS and
ROLL-AXIS
inputs to
each servo.
Any
input which is not
required
-
e.g.
ROLL for the central
servo
-
is
simply
set to zero
(00/o),
i.e. switched
otf.
The servo assignment
is simple:
Servo
No. 1
controls
HEAD-MlX,
Servo
No. 2 controls HEAD-MlX,
Servo
No. 5 controls
HEAD-MlX.
Naturally,
you
still
have to set the
magnitude and
direction of the three
inputs.
As
an
example to
help
you
remember, the display
will
look like this
(servo
No. 2):
H5:,ItjH :;EFjtJu
:
I
TLt HEHtt-l'lI
lir
The 4-point linkage
is, in
practice,
a
go-degree
arrange-
ment
with 2
oitch-
axis servos.
Your PROFI mc 3010
makes everything
very simple.
You assign
'HEAD-MIX"
to, say, servos 3
to 6.
You will
find the necessary adjustments
on
page
62.
I
AEargem.nt
9d
",1
U
,
"*:*.
l.
ffi-'x
(+
clllocllr. lro|]l
J
S€rw 5
tor
n
ro
r.0ü!) Call€ciiv!
picn
3.
The
"Heim"
$t ashplate
This swasholate
is
also
free
to
move axially,
and collec-
*
tive
pitch
is achieved by
this
movement.
However, it
is only
controlled
directly
by
two
(outboard)
servos;
when they
move in the
same direction
the
result is
a collective
pitch
move-
ment; when they
move in
opposite
directions
the
result
is a roll movement.
A bellcrank
is
provided
for
Ditch-axis control.
and this
is operated
by the
pitch-
axis
servo,
which
is
mounted at
righlangles to
the rotor shatt.
The bellcrank
"tloats",
and
thus moves
up
and down
with the swashplate.
The bellcrank
"de-
couples"
pitch-axis
control
from collective
pitch.
By an
ingenious
design of the
floating bellcrank
pivot
"flare"
mixing is achieved
automatically, so
no special
"flare"
mixer is needed.
A soecial
"HEIMHEAD"
mixer is
provided
for the two
"coilective
oitch/roll"
servos.
collective
pitch
roll-axis
Servo assignment
is as Jollows:
Servo
No. 1 controls
HEIMHEAD
Servo
No.
5 controls
HEIMHEAD
Servo
No. 2 controls
PITCH-AXIS
Transmitter
control options
for helicopter control
systems
The transmitter
oflers a series ol options
tor helicopter
control
systems, exactly
like the fixed-wing
control sys-
tems,
which
you
can
"activate",
and adjust,
when
you
need
them.
ll the term
"transmitter
control
options"
is not clear,
please
turn back to
page
32
and read that section.
To some extent
these ootions are
identical to
those tor
fixed-wing
models;
however, some of them
are specific
to helicopters.
The
helicopter-specific
options are explained
in the
fol-
lowing section.
Here
again,
you
are free to
make use of as
many of
these
options
-
or as
few of them
-
as
you
wish.
The
following options are available:
ODtion
Transmitter control
Dual Rate
PITCH,
ROLL, YAW
(tail
rotol)
Exponential
COLL.
PITCH, PITCH,
ROLL, YAW
Travel adj., both
s. PITCH, ROLL,
YAw, COLL. PITCH.
Centre adjust
PITCH, ROLL, YAW MIXTURE,
COLL. PITCH*-
ldle
THROTTLE
Fixed
value THROTTLE
Throttle curve
collEgrlvE
PITCH
Direc
hrot
e
coLLECrlvEPITCH
Gyro ON/OFF
GYRO
'"Coll€ctive
pitch
maximum" and
"coll.
pitch
minimum"
in helicopter terminology.
"
"Collective
pitch-hover"
in helicopier terminology.
The
"collective
pitch
curve"
The term
"collective
pitch
curve"
refers to the
relation-
ship between
the
position
of the collective
pitch
stick
and
the actual angle
of collective
pitch.
Please
refer to
Fio. 36
here:
Fig.36
When the collective oitch
stick is set to
"Centre",
the
helicopter
is required to
hover: this
is the
"Hover
Point"
(HP).
The corresponding
angle ol
rotor blade
pitch
is
usually
stated by
the helicopter
manufacturer, and
is
usually
in the range +2lo
+4 degrees;
+3 degrees
is
a
good
starting
point
for
your
own experiments.
At the
"maximum
collective
pitch"
stick
position
the
rotor blades
are set to the
maximum
pitch
angle for
nor-
mal flying; here abbreviated
to
"P+".
lts actual
value is
best
discovered
in
practical
flight testing,
as it varies
according
to the motor
power
available
(see
below).
At the
"
bottom
end"
is
the
"minimum
collective
pitch"
position
-
point
"P-".
This setting
is not critical and
varies according
to the
model and the
pilot.
lt is best
for
beginners
to stick
to the helicopter
manulacturer's
rec-
ommendation
here; experts
will have their
own ideas.
You can
adjust all
three
points
independently of each
other.
In tact, these
adjustments are
no different
from
centre
adjustment
and separate
travel adjustment
of the
collective
pitch
transmitter control,
and
you
will find
them in the
menu under these
terms. So:
move to the
"Adiust
transmitter
controls"
menu;
leaf through to the
COLLECIIVE
PITCH
control.
Set
the hover
point (HP)
with the
"Centre"
ootion. and
collective
pitch
maximum
and
minimum with the
option
"Asymmetrical
Travel".
Note:
As
collective
pitch
is always adjusted
in conjunc-
tion with the
"throttle
curve",
we will have
to come back
to this subject
in due course.
Colleclive
pitch
servo
SP
Collective
pilch
slick
o
The
"throttle
curve"
The
level of motor output, i.e. the
position
of the throttle
slide
in the carburettor, is usually derived trom the
posi-
tion of the collective
pitch
stick
for normal flying. The
relationship betvveen the two is termed the
"throttle
curve".
The
options
You can select either of two types of
curve:
"3-pointcurve"
Fig.37;
or
"s-point
curve"
Fig.38.
The
philosophy
concerning control
and adiustment
is the same
for
both curves:
The starting
point
is always the hover, as this is the
most
important
basic adjustment. The collective
pitch
reouired for the hover is determined within close limits
by
the
design
of the helicopter. The required
"throttle"
setting for the hover is adjusted to match the collective
pitch
setting.
The next important
"corner
point"
is maximum collec-
tive
pitch.
This cannot be set to any old value, however,
as it deoends on the maximum oower oJ the motor. For
this
reason full
throttle
is
set
first,
and the
maximum
possible
collective
pitch
subsequently set to
match it.
The last corner
ooint
is
"minimum
throttle" at low
collec-
tive oitch. On oider transmitters this is where the
"idle-
up", or throttle
pre-select
function was used. To avoid con-
fusion, we have also termed this
point
"lU'.
In
this case
the throttle is adjusted with the rotor
"unloaded";so
that
the rotor
speed
remains
as
nearly
constant as
possible.
-100!6
'50c;t
0 50%
100!6
Fig.38
ffsP
=
"
Full
throttle forward". s-ooint curve
fbsP
=
"Full
throttle back", s-point
curve
First the 3-point curve.
Stay at
"fi3P"
and
press
the
Z
key.
"HP"
(hover point)
will flash. You
are already at the
point
where
you
adjust
the
"hover
throttle" setting. Use the
El
or
El
keys
(or
the Digi-Adjustor), to set the desired value; e.g. 750lo
(here
00/o
=
throttle closed; 1000/o
=
Jull throttle).
Move
the stick back to the
full-throttle
oosition and hold
it
there.
The
display
will now
show
"
P+
"
instead
of
"HP";
and
you
can again
set
the correct value
using
the
E)
and
El
keys, or the Digi-Adjustor.
Caution:
you
are now
adiusting
collective
pitch
maximum
(not
full throttle)!
This method
of adjustment
is
based on
practical
experi-
ence:
full
throttle
is
a
fixed
value, and
maximum
collec-
tive
pitch
must
be set to
match
that
value. lf
you
want
proof
that
you
are actually setting collective
pitch
maxi-
mum,
you
can later move to the
"Asymmetrical
Travel"
option, and examine COLLECTIVE PITCH travel at
"stick
back".
There
you
will f ind
the same
value
set.
Now to minimum throttle. Move the stick foMard and
hold it there; the display will now show
"1U".
You can
now set the carburettor
position
for collective
pitch
mini-
mum; e.g. 100/0.
The
s-point curve
The setting-up
procedure
is similar to that outlined
above.
No
doubt
you
realise
that
you
must first
select
"5P"
instead of 3P
lf
you
have
already set up a 3-point curve, then those
values
still apply. Otherwise
you
should set those three
points
firsl, as already
described.
100fi
Throttle
SP
---:.7
IU
Collective
pitch
stick
3
-
point
curue
0+
Fig.37
The
3-point curve
is
simpler
to
set up, and
is
adequate
in most cases. lt also forms the basis Jor the s-point
cu
rve.
The
s-point curve oflers a
further,
adjustable
point
above and below
the hover
point,
so that
you
can
match
the
required motor
power
more
accurately to the charac-
teristics of
your
motor. By
setting these two
points
the
"throttle
curve"
is
endowed with either a
progressive
or
a
regressive shape. lt
also
provides
an easier
method of
increasing
power
for
"negative
collective
pitch"
-
i.e. for
aerobatics.
The only drawback is that it
gives you
more
work
at
the adjustment stage.
The
additional Doint
in the middle.
between
hover
Doint
and
maximum collective
pitch,
is termed
"S+",
the
point
between
hover
and
minimum
collective Ditch
"S-".
How to
set
the
points
It is very helpful
if
you
become familiar with the
process
of selecting
and adiusting these
curves, so
we recom-
mend that
you
carry out the
following
practice
session.
At the
"Adjust
transmitter controls" menu, select the
COLLECTIVE
PITCH
control, and then select the
"Throttle
curve" ootion. The menu will look like this:
rEt:t::[tLL.
[:UE:t-lEr
rf'f'IF HF: bül{ r
Press the
Il
key;
the
"bottom
left-hand
corner"
will
flash.
You
can
now
select either
'fl'
or
'fb',
using the
@
key.
Choose between
"3P"
and
"5P"
with
the
E
and
E
keys.
You can
probably
guess
what
the abbreviations
mean
already:
ff3P
=
"Full
throttle foMard". 3-ooint curve
fb3P
=
"Full
throttle
back". 3-boint
curve
56
-100!6
,50c;t
You are
sure
to have discovered
by now that
the symbol
"S+"
appears
in
the display
when
you
move
the stick
between
"HP"
and
"P+".
This is the additional
point
interDosed between
hover and
maximum collective
pitch.
Hold
the stick
in
that
position
and enter
the
value
vou
think correct.
Exactly
the same
applies on
the
"other
side".
Between
"HP"
and
"lU'
you
will find
"S-".
Hold,the stick
in this
oosition
and enter the correct
value with the
El
and
E
keys, or
the Digi-Adjuslor.
Adjusting
the values
in flight
Caution:
never attempt to
make changes
in flight using
the
keypad.
The risk of making a
catastrophic error
is
too
great!
Always
use
the Digi-Adiustor
for making
in-flight
adiustments.
Yoü don't
really need to concern
yourself
with the details
of
adjusting
this curve.
lf
you
rotate the Digi-Adjustor
during a
flight,
it
adjusts
that
part
of the curve
which corresponds
to
the
position
of the collective
pitch
stick at
that moment
-
just
as
when setting up
the curve
in
the
first
place.
Never-
theless
-
a few words on
the basic
principles:
The 3-ooint
curve:
When vou
rotate the
knob, the
minimum throttle
posi-
tion, ttie
hover
throttle setting
or the collective
pitch
maximum
setting
will be altered,
depending
on the
position
of the collective
pitch
stick.
The s-ooint
curve:
Here again"
minimum throttle,
the central
part
of
the
curve,
br the collective
pitch
maximum
setting
is
altered, depending
on
the
position
ot the collective
pitch
stick
(the
centre
part
moves the three
points
S-,
HB
S+
"in
parallel").
In
brief:
Because ot
the
"intelligent"
method adopted
for
throttle
adiustments,
a single adiustor
is
sufficient
for in-flight adiustments.
This makes operation
much simpler,
and
removes a
whole bundle of stress
from the
pilot.
Now to recap:
you
have two useful
adiustment
facilities:
on the one
hand
you
can
ad,ust the
"throttle
curve"
as
just
described;
on the
other
you
can
adiust collective
pitch
(the
hover setting) at any
time, using
the collective
oitch trim
slider.
The
"throttle
slider"
The throttle
slider can also
be used to
influence the
throt-
tle setting.
There are two
optional
modes of operation.
Normal
mode of operation
While
you
are
in this mode
oJ operation,
the slider
works
as a
"limiter"
for the
throttle. At any
time the
maximum
throttle
position
is
limited to the current
posi-
tion of the
throttle slider;
regardless
ot where
your
col-
lective
pitch
stick
is set, and
regardless of
how
you
have
set
uD the
throttle curve.
ln diaorammatic
form:
The throttle
slider
is set to the
value shown
in the dia-
gram
by
the dotted
line.
lf
you
now set the
collective
pitch
stick
to minimum
and slowly
push
it
towards
maxi-
mum, the
throttle at
first follows the throttle
curve shown
bv the
doudash
line. From
the
point
at
which the
two
lines
meet, the throttle
remains constant,
and
follows
the
dotted
line again.
lf
you
now set
the slider to a
lower
point,
so that
its
vaiue
is completely
below the
throttle curve,
then the
curve
has
no
effect,
and throttle
is controlled
entirely by
the slider.
Practical
application:
Using
the throttle
slider
you
can reduce
throttle
inde-
pendently
of the collective
pitch
position,
or, at
the other
extreme,
release
it again. lf
you
reduce throtlle
greatly
with the slider,
you
will drop below
the speed at
which
the centrifugal
clutch
"bites":
idle with
helicopter
"
landed".
The whole
thing in
reverse: the helicopter
is on the
ground;
throttle
is
"closed";
motor at
idle. To take off
push
the throttle and
revs
high
(collective
pitch
mini-
mum): the
"throttle
curve"
takes over,
and
with the
throttle
fully
released the
helicopter can
finally be taken
otf by
increasing collective
pitch.
"Direct
throttle"
mode of operation
In many cases
-
for example,
tor adiusting
the motor
-
the throttle
needs to be adjusted
without
any automatic
variation ot collective oitch.
In this case
a switch
is
used
to disconnect
the coliective
pitchlthrottle
coupling:
this
is termed
"Direct
throttle".
In this mode of operation
the throttle
is adiusted
directly,
using the slider
alone.
As usuä|,
you
have to tell the
transmitter
which switch
vou
want to use to select
"Direct
Throttle".
This is done
ät the
'Adjust
transmitter
controls"
menu, as a
transmit-
ter control
option under
COLLECIIVE
PITCH.
First move
to the
'Adiust
transmitter
controls"
menu,
select
the collEgllvE
PITcH transmitter
control,
press
the
N
key, and then
leaf through
with the
El
key
until
you
reach the
"
Direct
Throttle" option.
rrg db
You will see this:
rE:
t-:uLL.
TLr THF:1
lEF HF:tlTE:
r_rFF
r
Press
the
Z
key first, lhen switch
ON
with the
El
key,
and
finally select the switch
you
want to use
with the
El
and
E
keys.
Now
you
can switch
between
"throttle
coupled
to col'
lective
pitch"
and
"direct
throttle
control"
by means
ot
the
mechanical switch
you
have
just
selected.
Note:
The
idle
oosition
of
the throttle slider
is
switchable
between
"idle
back" and
"idle
forward", as
with fixed-
wing
models.
lt
you
wish to
do this,
move to the
"Adiusj
transmitter
controls"
menu
and select
the
THROTTLE
control.
You can
now select
the
"ldle"
option and
adjust
the throttle oosition
Jor the
"idle"
position
of the slider
and switch
between
forward
and back
(2,
then
tr)'
Switching
the
idle
position
is indicated
by the
prefix.
Auto-rotation
One switch
can
be dedicated
as an
auto-rotation
selec-
tor.
When
it is switched
to auto-rotation,
the transmitter
does
two things:
1.
lt
sets
the throttle
to a
pre-selected
setting
(idle
lor
practising;
OFF
tor competition
work).
2.
Any limit set
on collective
pitch
travel at
the
transmitter
control end
is lifted
(to
make f ull col-
lective
pitch
movement
available).
lf
you
do
not
require this
feature, adjust
collective
pitch
travel
at
the servo
only.
You
will now
probably
be
thinking:
'what
about
the tail
rotor?"
Normally, because
main rotor
power
torque
is
absent
during
auto-rotation,
the
mixing of collective
oilch to
tail rotor
has to be
removed.
The PROFI
mc 3010
offers
you
a very simple
and
elegant
feature:
you
simply
need to
move to the
"Servo
adiustment"
menu, select
"TAILROT",
and select
the
"doLLECIIVE
PITCH" input as
switchable,
then
assign
the
same switch
as for auto-rotation.
lf, for exam-
ple, you
select
the switch
"55"
for auto'
rotation
(we're
just'coming
to that!),
then
make the coLLEcTlvE
PITCH
input to
"TAILROT"
also switchable
by
"S5".
There
is a further
possible
refinement
to this;
please
read the
note at the
end ol this
section.
What
you
have
to adiust:
There
are two
points
to
remember
here:
1.
Set
the
"auto-rotation
throttle" to
"Fixed
Value"
2. Assign
the
"auto-rotation"
switch.
This should
tell
you
where
you
will
find auto-rotation:
it
is
"
hidden" under
THROTTLE.
To do
this,
move again
to the
"Transmitter
Optionsl
menu;
then on
to the
THROTTLE control.
Press the
N
key and
select
the
"FlX-1"
(fixed
value) option
with
the
E
keY.
You
will see
the following
display:
rE:
THHr:rT
FIll-1r
r[rFF
E]':r
First:
"auto-rotation
throttle"
Press the
Z
key
followed by
El,
then set
the desired
throttle
setting
in the usual
way with
the
El
or
E
keys,
or
the Digi-Adjustor;
0
-
100/o
is
a
good
starting
point.
Now define
the auto-rotation
switch:
Press the
Sl
key, then
select the
switch
you
want to use,
using
the
E
and
E
keys, as
usual;
for example
the
switch
"S5".
That's all there
is to
it.
Now to the
actual
problem.
For auto-rotation
the
collective
pitch
input
needs to be
switched
ofi.
This
is
the
procedure:
move to the
'SWITCH
SERVO"
menu and assign
the
"COLLEC'
TIVE PITCH"
inout to the
auto-rotation
switch 55.
Switch
the'INPUT'to
"F|XED
VALUE" and assign
the
switch
55
to that too, but
working
in the opposite
direc-
tion.
To
do
this,
with the input
field still active
(flashing),
oress E
.
Sample
display,
memory
15, BK 117:
r5EFI.
5: TH
I LF;ÜT.
r[:[rLL,
:
!,5+.
r
r5EFt.
5:
Trl I LF:r:rT.
rFiiiEtl:
-i5'+.+
r
The net etfect
is that by
operating
the switch
S5
you
close
the throttle,
set collective
pitch
otf, set a
(variable)
fixed value on,
and switch
to a second
collective
pitch
travel.
The travels
are
adjusted
in the SERVO
TRAVEL &
REVERSE
menu.
Gyro
suppression
"Suppression"
means
reducing
or eliminating
the
damping
effect
of the
gyro
when the
pilot
wishes
to
override
it. This is essential,
as
the
gyro
is only intended
to
reduce
unwanted
flight
movements due
to
gusts
etc.,
and
not to counteract
deliberate
efforts
on the
part
of
the
pilot.
There are
three basic
types ot
gyro:
1.
Gyros
with
no
special
facilities
tor
allowing
control
from the
transmitter.
Some
ol these
gyros
also have
a
"suppression"
effect,
which
is derived
from the
yaw
control signal
emanating
from
the
receiver.
These
gyros
have only
one connec-
tion
to
the receiver.
lf
you
are
using
this type
of
gyro,
you
do
not need
to assign
"GYRO'
to a transmitter
con'
irol
nor a servo.
There
is nothing else
to say
on this type
ol device.
2. Gyros
whose
sensitivity
can be altered
or switched
otf trom
the transmitter.
For this
type ot
gyro
a switched
transmitter
control
is
needed
(e.9.
channel
"G"),
which
is then assigned
to
the
"GYRO"
function;
you
will also
need a
"servo"
out-
put
by the
name
of
"GYRO".
This
is where the sensitiv-
ity sr,tiitcn
input
from the
gyro
is
connected.
"Automatic
proportional
suppression"
is of
no relevance
here
"Gyro
suppression"
at the
'GYRO"
transmitter
control
is therefore
set
to
"OFF".
3.
Gyros
with
proportional
sensitivity,
adjustable
from
the
transmitter.
This is the
type of
gyro
with
which we are
primarily
con-
cerned
here.
To
control
the sensitivity
of the
gyro
a spe-
cial
signal
is derived
from the
YAW signal
in the trans-
mitter, and
this signal
is then
transmitted
to the
gyro
via
the servo
outout
"GYRO":
this is termed
"automatic
gyro
control"
or
"automatic
gyro
suppression".
How suppression
works
The transmitter
generates
a
"suppress"
signal
which is
proportional
to the
tail rotor stick
position
(regardless
of
the direction
of
movement). This signal
is transferred to
the
"sensitivity
input" of the
gyro
via a separate
chan-
nel. The
further the stick
is moved, the more the sensF
tivity of the
gyro
is reduced; the
less sensitive
it
becomes.
the
less
effect
it has, and the
more the model
resoonds
to deliberate control
movements.
This
effect
is
represented
in Fig. 40. Fig.
40
a shows
the suppression
signal,
40 b the
corresponding
gyro
effect.
Fio.40 b
The
gyro
usually
has two adjustors
which are used
to
set
top and bottom
limits on
the sensitivity
range.
At the lransmitter
end a slider
or a switch can be
used
to control
"GYRO".
lf a slider
is used,
it becomes
possible
to adiust
"gyro
suppression"
steplessly
(not
to be confused
with
infi-
nitely
adjustable
suppression,
which is
proportional
to
stick
movement!).
In this case the
range of adjustment
is within
the limits set
on the
gyro
itself. Using a switch,
on the
other hand,
you
can
"only"
switch
between the
two
limits set on the
gyro.
In
practice,
this latter
facility
has
proved
to be
quite
adequate;
an
inlinitely adiustable
setting
is really one thing
too many
for most
pilots
to
cooe
with. Please
read the note at
lhe end of this
sec-
tion
in
this
connection.
The system
in
practice
We will suppose, as an
example,
that
you
have
assigned
"transmitter
control
H
=
GYRO"
and
"Servo
No. 6 controls
GYRO", as already
described.
As switch
lor the Gyro function
you
can use either
a
2-oosition
switch
with 2-core lead, or a 3-position
switch
with 3-core
lead. To be able
to exploit the
full
control
travel when
you
are using
a switch
with
a
2-core lead a
value of 1000/o must be set at
the
"Centre"
option.
Now all
that is left is to switch
automatic suppression
on.
Move
to
the
"Transmitter
Control
Options"
menu
and leaf through
to control H.
Press
N
and
the
El
and
E
keys to select
"AUTO".
You
will see this display:
rH:
tj'T'Fjt:t
HUT|_].
I
:;I-IFF'F:E:;:;:
üFF
r
Press the
A
key, then
E
.
"OFF"
is replaced by
"ON";
and that's
it.
.
Tip:
-
Connect a servo
(instead
of a
gyro)
lo the receiver
"GY-
RO" output
for this setting up
process.
You will then be
able to see
exactly how the suppression
effect
works.
With switch
H
set
to
OFF
and the tail
rotor stick at cen-
Fio.40 a
tre, the servo
will be at one end-point.
lf
you
now
oper'
-
ate
the stick, the servo
will run towards
the other end-
point,
its movement
proportional
to the stick
position;
regardless
ol which side the stick
is moved to.
lf
you
now set switch
H to ON, the servo
runs
straight
to
this end-point,
and is not affected
by movement ol
the
stick:
it receives the signal
"gyro
fully suppressed".
lf necessary:
Depending
on
your
particular gyro,
it may turn out that
the
suppression
works
"the
wrong way round";
i.e.
when the tail
rotor stick is at centre,
suppression
is at a
maximum, and
it reduces as stick
detlection
increases.
In this case
you
need to
move to the
"
Servo
adiust-
ment"
menu. Select
"TRAVEL
+
REVERSE" and leal
through
until
you
reach
"Servo"
No. 6. Press the
Sl
key, then
E.
You have
now
"
reversed"
gyro
suppres-
sron.
Supplementary
notes
1. Minimum
and maximum suooression
During
this description
we have assumed
that the
"cor-
ner values"
for
suppression
(maximum
and minimum
suppression),
between
which
you
can move using
the
switch
H, were set on the
gyro
itself, as explained
at the
beginning
of the section.
lf the
gyro
does
not otfer this
feature, or
you
want to
carry
it
out at
the transmitter,
then there
is
an alternative
method:
Move
to the
"Servo
adjustment"
menu, select
'TRAVEL
+
REVERSE", and set the
"travel"
of
gyro
suppression
as
you
wish.
When
you
adjust the
travel
(you
can do it separately
for both directions!),
all
you
are
doing
is
selting
the corner
values for
gyro
suppression
(see
Fig. 41).
o
+
59
-100s
2. ON/OFF switch
for
gyro
suppression
Gyro suppression
can
also be
switched
on and off
in
flight
with a
physical
switch.
All
you
have to do
is
assign
a switch
(e.9.
Sl
-
55)
under
the
"Suppression"
Ootion.
At the same
time this
switch can
be set
to
switch
in the Dual
Rates Option
for
yaw
control,
to
pre'
vent unwanted
tail
rotor servo
movement.
+100q6
Tad rolor
3üat(
Fig.41
The
transmitter
controls
You
may well
have read through
the
information
concerning
fixed-wing
models in order
to understand
how the
system
works
(no
bad
idea), but
please
note
that
you
must never adopt
the transmitter
control
desighations
of the
fixed-wing
pilot.
You
may be
tempted
to think:
aileron
-
well, that's
roll, and
lcan
remember
that
easily.
You may be
able to
remember
it,
but
that's
not
good
enough
for
your
transmitter.
Enter
"Aileron",
and
it will
give
up
with an error
message,
but usually
not until
you
have
finished
your
setting-up
procedure.
That's enough
of
the
preaching.
Assuminq
that
vour
transmitter
is at the Status
display,
press
t-he
kbys
EIZ
N Z
to
reach
ASSIGN
CONTROLS.
Activate the
input field
Z
and
press
the
El
key
to reach control
"4".
"A"
is the left-hand
stick unit
(the
letters are
printed
on
the
transmitter).
Release this
input field
with the
fl
key
(field
flashes).
Leaf through
the suggested
control
list with
the
E
or
El
keys until
you
find the
required
function.
For examole:
A controls
ROLL;
now
press
the
Z
key, and
E
once.
In the display
you
see
"B
controls
. . .
"
(something
or
other).
Press
5l
again,
and select
the
required
f
unction
with the
El
or
E
keys or the Digi
Adjustor.
B controls
COLLECTIVE
PITCH
(or,
if
you prefer,
PrTCH-AXrS).
The orocedure
should be
obvious
now
Continue
this
process
until
you
have assigned
functions
to all
the transmitter
controls
you
need.
Assign
"-----"
(Nothing)
to
controls
you
don't
need.
However,
please
don't
assign
the same
function
to
two controls,
e.g.
"E
controls
throttle
controls
throttle"! On
no account
forget
to assign
"THROTTLE"
to one
of the sliders
(E
or
F).
Now
you
will need
your
helicopter;
or at
least a
receiving
system
complete
with servos.
Go
back to
the
'ASSIGN"
menu with the
El
key, and
branch
to SERVO
with
S.
We
will begin with servo
No.3.
The servo sequence
is not binding,
but
please
keep to
our
suggestions
while we deal
with our examples.
60
Servo 3
is the servo
which controls
the tail
rotor. So
press
the
N
key again
(the
servo
No. will flashl and
move to servo
3 with the
El
key. Now
press
the
El
key
to release
the input
field
(field
flashes). Use the
E
or
El
keys or the
Digi Adjustor
to select
the
"TAIL
ROTOR"
mixer. ll
you
now move the
yaw
stick
(and
if
your
receiving system
is switched
on), the
tail rotor
servo
will move.
Move the collective
pitch
stick, and
the same
servo
should also
respond.
Normally
you
would assign all
the servos
in turn, and
then
make any
adjustments
necessary.
This time,
however,
we will run through
the
procedure
step
by
srep.
Press the
E)
key
repeatedly until
you
return to
Menu
1.
Branch to servo
Adjustment
with the
Z
key,
press
the
E
key
(CENTRE)
and check
that all
servos are at
Oo/o.
lf not,
press
Z
(input
field
flashes), set
them to 00/o
with the
El
and
E
keys, then
leave the
menu with the
@
key. Otherwise
leave the
menu immediately
with
@.
Nöw branch
to TRAVEL
+ REVERSE
with the
Z
kev.
You will see
this:
r5EFl.
5: TH I LFlr:rT.
r
+'-+Etil
Fl+
t,illllr.l
J
Check
the direction
of effect
of the
yaw
servo.
lf the
servo
rotates in the
wrong direction,
activate
the
appropriate
input field
with the
f)
key and
press
@
once: the
prefix
will
alter,
and
your
tail
rotor
servo
will
be
reversed
for the
yaw
input.
Now the collective
pitch
input:
Press
the
Z
key and
El
until
COLLECTIVE
PITCH
appears.
work out
in which direction
the
tail rotor must
deJlect
in order
to compensate
{or the torque
effect
of
the
main
rotor. lf necessary,
reverse
this for maximum
collective
pitch,
as described
for the
yaw
input.
r5EF:.
i: TIl
I LF:ÜT,
r
+f,tlr:i
[tt'
t-:t-]LL.r
A
good
starting
point
is about
300/0.
Your tail
rotor mixer
requires a lurther
input
(press
the
Z
key, then
El).
FIXED VALUE
You only
need this
if
your
helicopter
has a tail
rotor
which
continues
to rotate during auto-rotation.
More on
this under
"Auto-rotation".
The default
for FIXED
VALUE
is
"OFF"
("SWITCH
SERVO"
menu). For
now
leave it unchanged.
THROTTLE SERVO
Let's
move on to the
next servo. Leave the
Adjustment
menu
with the
@
key
and
move through
Menu 1,
Menu
2
and
Assign
to
"Assign
servos". Select
servo
6,
release
the
inout field, and select the
"THROTTLE"
function using
the
E
and
E
keys. Later,
if
you
wish to
set up
a mixer circuit
for aerobatic
flying,
you
would
select
"DYN.
THROTTLE" here.
For our experiment
we
will
stay
with
THROTTLE.
lf
you
now
push
the throttle slider
(the
usual control)
torward, and
operate the
collective
pitch
slick,
your
throttle servo should
move.
Here
again
we need to set a basic
adjustment,
and
SCIECT thE
THROTTLE CURVE.
Press
@
to
return to Menu
1, then branch
to the
"TRANSMITTER
CONTROU'
adjustment
menu.
Select OPTIONS,
then the Collective
Pitch control.
Using
the
N
selector key,
move on to
"CURVE".
Release
the input
f ield with
!
(ff
3 or
similar
flashes)
you
can select
a 3- or s-point
throttle
curve as
preferred,
using
E
or
E)
keys, set
the full throttle
position
with the
E
key
(ff
=
full throttle
forward, lb
=
full throttle back
-
more details
on
page
56).
After
releasing the
input field
you
can set up
the throttle
curve
with the
help of the collective
pitch
stick.
For a 3-ooint
curve:
tU
=
tdte
Up
HP
=
Hover Point
Throttle
maximum
(servo
travel)
And for a s-ooint
curve:
lU
=
ldle Uo
S-
=
Pre-idle
point
HP
=
Hover Point
S+
=
Pre-max. throttle
point
Throttle
maximum
(servo
travel)
Note here
that the throttle
slider should
be set to
full
throttle.
Now
to the
rotor head
This
is the only area
in which
model helicopters
exhibit
major
ditferences.
We will describe
5 difjerent
examples:
Schlueter
Heim
3-point
CPM
go-degree,
with virtual rotation
4-point CPM
with virtual
rotation
3-point
CPM
l2o-degree,
with virtual
rotation
lf
you
wish, skip
the examples
which are
of no interest
at
present.
SCHLUETER
That
means
no rotor
head mixing
(no
electronic
mixers).
Return to
Menu 1 with the
El
key, then
move
Io Menu
2, to ASSIGN
ANd
ASSIGN
SERVOS.
Now
select:
Servo
No. 1 controls
ROLL-axis
Servo
No. 2 controls
PITCH-axis
Servo
No.
4
controls
COLLECTIVE
PITCH
Naturally this set-up
will only
work if
you
connect
the
servos
to the corresponding
receiver output
sockets.
Return to Menu
l with the
El
key, then
go
to
Servo
Adjustment,
TRAVEL +
REVERSE.
Check
the direction of
rotation oJ the servos
and set up
the approximate
servo
travels.
To
do
this, activate the
appropriate
input field with
S,
set
the travels
with the
E
and
E
keys
(holding
the
transmitter controls
at the
corresponding
end-points)
for both sides
of centre.
You
can
reverse any of the servos
with the
trl
key
if
necessary.
HEIM
When
we
speak
of a
HEIM rotor head
(HEIMHEAD)
we
are
referring to the classic
version
with the freeJloat-
ing
pitch-axis
rocker
(see
also
page
55).
Return to
Menu 1 with the
E]
key, then move to
Menu 2
and
on to ASSIGN SERVOS.
Select
(Assign)
the servos as
tollows:
Servo
No. 1 controls
HEIMHEAD
Servo
No. 2 controls
PITCH
Servo
No.
4
controls
HEIMHEAD
The two
roll
servos
are connected
to the
receiver out-
puts
1 + 4, and
the
pitch-axis
servo
to output
2.
Use
the
@
key to return to
Menu 1, then on to Servo
Adjust-
ment, TRAVEL +
REVERSE.
First select servo
l and the Collective
Pitch input.
Operate
the collective
pitch
stick
-
look at servo
1 only
-
and check
the direction
of rotation of the servo.
Reverse
it il necessary.
Now look at servo
4. lf the direction
of rotation
for col-
lective
pitch
should be
wrong, switch to
this servo and
reverse the collective
pitch
input.
Now
for the two roll servos
and the
roll input: operate
the
ROLL stick and
watch the servos.
lf the direction
ot
rotation of one or both
servos
is incorrect, select
the
corresponding
servo,
then the
roll input, and set
the
correct direction
of rotation.
3-point
linkage,
90'degree
"HEAD-MlX"
The 90-degree
arrangement
is swiftly
losing
popularity
since
the distribution
of forces
is very inefficient.
Nev-
ertheless,
we
will describe the application
in
detail.
We assume
that
you
are at
the Status display.
Move
to
Menu 1 with the
El
key, then to
Menu 2 with the
El
key,
and then
via ASSIGN to
ASSIGN SERVOS.
There
you
assign the servos
as
lollows:
Servo
No.
1
controls
HEAD-MIX
Servo
No.
2
controls
HEAD-MIX
Servo
No. 4 controls
HEAD-MlX
Once
more, to
remind
you:
Release
the SERVO
input line with the selector
key
[1.
Select
the servos
in turn
with the
E
or
E
keys.
Release the
Controls
field
again
with the selector
key
Z ,
and select
HEAD-MIX
with the
E
or
E
key.
Repeat the
process
with the second
servo, and so
on.
After
you
have assigned
the rotor
head
servos,
return to
Menu 1 using the
El
key and branch again
to SERVO
ADJUSTMENT. Select
Centre, and set
the
servo
centres. Check
here that the trim sliders
and
the transmitter
controls are set to
zerc
(Oo/o),
Return to the
"Servo
Adjustment" menu
with the
El
kev then branch
to TRAVEL +
REVERSE with the
seiector
key
Z
.
lmportant:
1. lt is essential
that
you
set the direction of
rotation of
the collective
pitch
inputs to the
head
servos
first.
Operate
the collective
pitch
stick, and
watch the
rotor
head servos. Check
carefully which servo
or
servos
rotate
in
the
wrong direction.
Select
the servo
concerned, then the Collective
Pitch
input, and
release the input field
(selector
key
5l).
Press the
tr
key to reverse the direction of
rotation of
that
input.
2. Select
the GEOMETRY
input for all the rotor
head
servos
in turn, and
set the
position
of each
servo in
degrees.
Now move to the
"SWITCH"
menu and
switch
on the Geometry
input for all
rotor head servos.
The
right-hand servo should be
90
degrees,
the
rear
servo
180 degrees, and the
left-hand servo
270
degrees.
lf
your pitch-axis
servo
lies in front oJ the
swashplate,
enter 0 degrees
instead of 180 degrees
for
servo
2.
/\z\
,t0"1
f
ro.
ll
\ /
Direction
\-,-/
of
flight
1800
lf
you
have
followed these instructions carefully,
all the
correct
roll-axis and
oitch-axis
movements will
now be
available
on
your
model.
3. lf
you
require
virtual rotation of the swashplate
for
your
helicopter, move to the
"SWITCH"
menu and
switch on the
"PHASE"
inDut
for one oJ the rotor
head
servos.
Now move to the
"TRAVEL
& REVERSE"
menu, and
from there
to the PHASE
input
(Z
and
EEI).
Select the degree
input
lield
\l
and set the
desired swashplate
rotation.
lf
you
hold the
pitch-axis
or
roll-axis stick at one
end-point,
you
will be able to
see
the change clearly.
4-point
linkage
"
HEAD-MlX"
The
4-point linkage
is
becoming
increasingly
popular.
Even
if one servo
lails
completely,
the
helicopter often
remains controllable,
and can be
"saved".
We assume
that
you
are at
the Status display.
Move to
Menu
l with the
E
key, then on to Menu
2 with the
Zl
key, on to
ASSIGN and finally to SERVO.
Assign the servos
as follows:
Servo
No. 1 controls
HEAD-MIX
Servo
No. 2 controls
HEAD-MIX
Servo
No. 4 controls HEAD-MIX
Servo
No. 5 controls
HEAD-MIX
Once
more, to remind
you:
Release
the SERVO
input line with the selector
key
N.
Select
the servos
in
turn
with the
El
or
E
keys.
Release the Controls
field again
with
the selector
key
62
01,
and select
HEAD-MIX
with the
El
or
E
key.
Repeat
the
process
with
the
second servo, and
so on.
After
you
have assigned
the
rotor head servos,
return to
Menu 1 using the
E
key and branch again
to SERVO
ADJUSTMENT. Select
Centre, and set
the
servo
centres. Check
here that the trim slide6
and
the transmitter controls
are set to
zero
(0%).
Return to the
"Servo
Adjustment"
menu with the
El
key,
then branch
to TRAVEL
+ REVERSE
with
the
selector
key
Z
.
lmportant:
1. lt is essential
that
you
set the direction
of rotation of
the collective
pitch
inpuls to the head servos
first.
Operate
the collective
pitch
stick, and
watch the rotor
head
servos.
Check carefully
which servo or servos
rotate in
the
wrong direction.
Select
the servo concerned,
then the Collective
Pitch
input, and release the
input field
(selector
key
!).
Press the
El
key to
reverse the direction
of rotation of
that
input.
2. Select the GEOMETRY
input of all
the rotor head
servos
in turn, and set the
position
of each servo
in
degrees. Then
move to the
"SWITCH"
menu and set
the
geometry
input
for
all
the rotor head servos.
The right-hand servo should
be 90 degrees,
the rear
servo
180
degrees,
the left-hand servo
270 degrees,
and
the front servo 0 degrees.
o0
/\z\
27ool
fto"
U
\ ,/
Direction
\--.'
of flight
18oo
lf
you
have
followed these instructions carefully,
all the
correct
roll-axis and
oitch-axis
movements
will now
be
available on
your
model.
3.
lf
you
require virtual
rotation of the swashplate
lor
your
helicopter, move to the
"SWITCH"
menu and
switch on
the
"PHASE"
input lor one ot the rotor
head
servos.
Now move to the
"TRAVEL
&
REVERSE"
menu, and
lrom
there
to the PHASE
input
(Z
and
EE)).
Select
the degree input
field
S
and set the
desired
swashplate
rotation. lf
you
hold the
pitch-axis
or roll-axis stick at
one end-point,
you
will be able to
see the change
clearly.
3-point
linkage, 120-deg.
"HEAD-MlX"
The 3-point,
12o-degree linkage
is the most
popular
arrangemenr.
We
assume
that
you
are at
the Status display.
Move to
Menu
1 with the
E]
key, then on to
Menu 2 with the
Z
key, on to
ASSIGN and
linally to
SERVO.
Assign the servos as
lollows:
Servo No.
1
controls
HEAD-MIX
Servo
No. 2 controls HEAD-MIX
Servo
No. 4 controls
HEAD-MIX
Once more, to
remind
you:
Release the SERVO
input line with the selector
key
B.
Select
the servos
in turn with the
El
or
E)
keys.
Release
the Controls field again
with the selector
key
Z
,
and select
HEAD-MIX
with the
E
or
E)
key.
Repeat the
process
with the second
servo, and so on.
After
you
have assigned
the rotor head servos,
return to Menu 1 using the
@
key and branch again
to
SERVO ADJUSTMENT.
Select Centre, and set
the
servo centres. Check
here that the trim sliders
and
the transmitter
controls are set
to zero
(00/o).
Return to the
"
Servo
Adjustment" menu
with
the
El
key,
then branch to TRAVEL +
REVERSE with the
selector
key
Z
.
lmportant:
1.
lt is
essential
that
you
set the direction
of rotation of
the collective
pitch
inputs to the
head
servos
first.
Operate
the collective
pitch
stick, and watch the
rotor
head servos.
Check carefully which servo
or
servos
rotate in the wrong direction. Select
the servo con-
cerned, then the Collective
Pitch input, and
release
the input
field
(selector
key
!).
Press the
E
key to
reverse the direction of
rotation of that input.
Select the GEOMETRY
input of all the
rotor head
servos
in turn. and set the
oosition
of each
servo in
degrees.
Move
to
the
"SWITCH"
menu and switch
on
the
geometry
input for all the
rotor head
servos.
The rioht-hand servo
should be 60 deqrees.
the rear
servo
-180
degrees and the
left-haid
servo
300
oegrees.
300,,//
\60"
f
\ ,/ Direction
\--./
of flisht
1800
lf
you
have followed these instructions caretully,
all the
correct
roll-axis and
oitch-axis
movements will now be
available
on
your
model.
3.
lJ
you
require virtual rotation of the swashplate
lor
your
helicopter, move to the
"SWITCH"
menu
and
switch on the
"PHASE"
inout lor one ot the rotor head
servos. Now
move
to the
"TRAVEL
&
REVERSE"
menu, and
from there to the
PHASE iHput
(Z
and
EE).
Select
the
degree
input
field
S]
and set
the
desired swashplate
rotation. lf
you
hold'the
pitch-axis
or
roll-axis
stick
at one end-point,
you
will
be
able to
see
the change clearly.
This
setting-up
procedure
produces
the
program
required for
your
model. You can now set up the trav-
els according
to
your
own experience
or the informa-
tion
provided
by the
helicopter manufacturer. Use an
angle
jig,
or check the settings by eye.
Teacher/Pupil operation
(sometimes
known as
the
"buddy-box"
system)
is
the best
method of learning to
control
a radio-controlled
model, Jrom the
point
of
view
of
model longevity.
"Teachet"
and
"Pupil"
have one
transmitter each,
inter-connected by
the Teacher/Pupil
lead,
Order
No. I 5121. Only
the teacher's transmitter
radiates an
RF
signal.
The
pupil's
transmitter
gener-
ates
a signal, but
it is not broadcast at
Radio Fre-
quency;
instead
it is transferred to the
teacher trans-
mitter through the cable,
where it
is
"processed".
For this
reason it is
vital
that only
basic signals
come
from the
pupil's
transmitter
-
no mixed
sig-
nals at all!
lf mixed
signals
are sent
to the teacher's
transmitter,
these signals
would be
processed
twice.
Assign the transmitter
controls of the
pupil's
trans-
mitter as follows:
e.g.
A controls
aileron B controls
throttle, etc.
and continue:
Servo
No. 1 controls
aileron Servo
No. 2 controls
elevator, etc.
lf
you
are using a difterent
transmittet e.g.
ROYAL
mc, be sure
to
switch
all
mixers
"OFF"
at the
pupil's
transmitter.
The
pupil's
transmitter does
not require an
RF
module.
However,
if
one
is fitted, it is automatically
switched
out of circuit
when the
lead is
plugged
in.
The teacher's
transmitter has to be
fitted with a
Teacher/Pupil
switch, by
means of which he can alter-
nate between
"pupil
has control" and
"teacher
has
control",
and can therefore
intervene whenever danger
threatens.
Teacher/Pupil operation
is basically restricted to the
four
main
stick
functions
(more
than this
is
unneces-
sary, and
is not recommended
in
any
case).
One
special advantage olfered
by the PROFI
mc
3010
transmitter
is that individual control
functions
-
e.g.
just
rudder, or
just
rudder
and elevator
-
can be trans-
terred, so that the
pupil
can
"learn
the
ropes" in
easy
srages.
We will assume
from now on that the
PROFI mc
3010 transmitter
is the
"teacher"
unit.
The tollowing types can be
used as the
pupil
trans-
mitter:
Naturally, other
PROFI mc 3010 /3030 transmilters;
any
other MULTIPLEX
transmitter
which is f itted with a
"diagnosis"
(closed
loop, or direct
servo control)
socket.
These
include
"
ROYAL
mc";
"COMBI"
and
"COMBI
90", Cockpit"
and
"
EUROPA-Sprint".
The teacher transmitter
must be
fitted with a
Teacher/Pupil switch.
The lollowing types of switch
can
be used:
ON/OFF switch,
long toggle Order
No. 7 5698 ON/OFF
switch,
short toggle Order
No. 7 5697
The best
locations for
"ouick
access"
to the switch are
bays
1,
Z
6,
12
(see page
5).
The
plug
from the switch
must
be
connected
inside
the
transmitter to the
"US"
connector;
see
page
7. lt
does
not matter which
way
round
you
insert the connector,
but make sure that
the
switch itself
is
the
right way round.
This is
explained
on
page
66
under
"Testing
the lransmitter
controls".
The two transmitters are
inter-connected by
the
Teacher/Pupil
lead, Order
No.8
5121.
The lead
is
simply
plugged
into both transmitter
charge sockets.
Caution:
The
ROYAL mc Co-Pilot lead Order
No. I
5122 cannot be used!
AE
1. Essential adjustments to the
Pupil
transmitter
a.) lf
it is not
a
PROFI mc
3010/3030 transmitter
set
the transmitter to
"PPM"
transmission mode
(as-
suming that
it has
two transmission modes). Switch
off any
mixers, Dual Rates
etc.
which may
be
in
lorce.
Set all the transmitter stick trims to centre.
At this
point you
should also check
which
servo
num-
bers
(=
666nna1
numbers)
are controlled by the trans-
mitter sticks. To do this, operate the
sticks
and check
at the
receiver which
servo
moves
and
which receiver
outDut
it is connected to.
Note down these
four
channel
numbers;
you
will need
them
later when
setting up the Teacher transmitter.
It is not
necessary
to
reverse
the transmitter controls,
or swap
plugs
over. Similarly
it makes no
difference
whether the
pupil,
lor example, f lies
"aileron
(helicop-
ter:
roll) right"
ot
"
lett"
i
the same applies to
"throttle
(collective pitch)
right" ot
"
left". These individual
pref-
erences are taken care of later when the Teacher
transmitter
is
set uD.
b)
For PROFI mc
3010
transmitters:
Here
the setting up
procedure
is
simple;
you
just
need
to
set
the transmitter to
"
Pupil mode".
To do this
move
to the
'"PUP|L"
menu, with the
key
seouence
@EaZ
.
You
will
see the
following
display:
--
FUFIL f,liltiE
--
I:;
: r_rFF
r
Press
Z
and then
tr.
'OFF'
is replaced
by
"ON".
That's all there is to it. Leave the menu and return to
the Status display
with
El E El
When
you
wish to return to
"normal
tlight operations"
later,
switch
back in exactly the same way.
In the top line ol the display the model name and
'Pupil"
will tlash alternately. This is the transmit-
ter's way of telling
you
that
it is in
"Pupil
mode".
This
mode is maintained
until
it is
switched
out
agaln
-
even if the transmitter is switched otf in the
meantime,
Here again,
you
will need to check which servo
(chan-
nel number) operates
which
control
function. You can
find this
information in the
"Assign
servos" menu;
there
you
will find something like this:
"Servo
No.3 controls
RUDDER";
"Servo
No.2
controls
ELEVATOR", and so on.
2.
Essential
adjustments
to the
Teacher transmitter
Here things
get
a
little more
complicated;
the PROFI
mc 3010 transmilter
gives you
so
many options that
you
are
forced to choose between them:
You
can
in tact arrange the sticks of the teacher
and
pupil
transmitters
in
a diflerent
layout. For
example,
the
pupil
can
fly
"aileron
left", and the
teacher
"aileron
right"; neither needs to depart
from his usual ways.
64
Even this is not so terribly difficult
to set up; all
you
need to know
is how
your pupil
usually llies.
There is
a special
menu lor these adiustments
in the
Teacher transmitter: the
"TEACHER"
menu.
You reach
this
menu with the key sequence
@ tr N A
.
You will
see
this:
.'+l:ll
LEE:
.'+:;Ft-tI
L
.r+FtLl[r[rE,r+ELEI-1fi
Note:
The
"arrangement"
and
type of the four main stick
functions in this menu
are based
on the model which
has
been selected
as the
"Teacher"
model. The menu
may
therefore
look
slightly different
in
some cases.
For
example, the ailerons may be in a different
"corner";
if
the model is a helicooter the control functions will
appear as collective
pitch,
roll,
pitch
and
yaw.
Now
you
have to tell the transmitter which channel
(=
servo) numbers of the
pupil's
system are to be taken
over by the
4
main control
functions.
For
example,
press
the
Z
key. The
slash sign
(i)
before
"+
rl I LEE0H' starts flashing.
lf
you
now
press
the
El
key, the
slash
is replaced by a
"1";
press
again, and
it
becomes
"2",
etc.
This means:
Channel
1
(or
2,
etc.)
in the
pupil
transmitter will be
taken
over
as the aileron signal in the teacher
transmitter, and
"replaces"
the teacher's aileron
stick.
lf
you
leave the
slash unchanged,
nothing will be
taken over, and control of ailerons
remains with
the
teacher,
lf it turns out that the control tunction is reversed
when the
pupil
is in control, simply
press
the
E
key while the channel number
is
still
flashing. The
"
-
"
arrow
will
be
replaced
by a
white
arrow on a
black background
(inverse
video); this
indicates
that
the direction of rotation is reversed when it is
"taken
over".
Assign
the
remaining three control Junctions in the
same
way.
The four
"arrow
keys"
are each
used to activate one of
the
four
control
function assignments in the menu.
Caution:
When
trying out the system, do
not forget to
set
the
Teacher/Puoil switch to
"ON":
otherwise the svstem
won't work at all!
And by the by ...
It is vital to determine
{irst
which channel
number
on
the teacher's transmitter controls
which function. Alter-
natively,
you
can
iust
try everything out
when
you
set
up
the system.
(although
in that case
you
would not
really
"understand"
what was
going
on).
We recommend that
you
practise
these
adiust-
ments
several
times
belore
you go
to the flying
field. At the take-off
strip
you
will not find the
atmosphere
quite
as
peacetul
as in
your
workshop.
You will undoubtedly have to change something or
other
at the flying site, tor example, when
you
want
to transfer
more
or
fewer control tunctions to the
pupil.
The
Rserve
Battery
$ctem
Tn
ns m itf-r; r c o
ntrc I testrhgl
The
Reserve Battery System
Many car drivers,
despite
having a large lueltank and
an
accurate
fuel
gauge,
carry
a reserve fuel can
in their car:
getting
stuck
with an empty tank
is
unpleasant,
and can
be dangerous.
lf
your
transmitter
"runs
out of
juice"
while
you
are
using it, then that
is rather worse than
unpleasant:
it usually
means the loss of the
model, not
to mention other
dangers.
The
reserve battery is a
form of safety net to
guard
against such
nasty surprises.
lt
gives you
a solid
reserve
operatrng
period
of about
15 minutes.
That is
enough
to
get
any model safely
onto the
ground
in one
piece.
How
it works
The reserve
battery is automatically
charged up
when-
ever
the main battery
is recharged,
through a special
electronic
circuit.
lt
cannot
be overcharged.
ln fact,
you
never need to
think about it at all under
normal circum-
stances.
lf the
voltage of
your
main transmitter battery
falls to the danger
point
and
the
audible
monitor signal
sounds,
then
you
can select
your
"utterly
certainf'
safety
system,
by manually switching
to the
reserve battery.
We
chose
this method of switching
deliberately.
The monitor
lamo will
flash for all the time the transmitter
is switched
to the
reserve battery. Because
of the flashing
lamp
you
are
bound to be aware
that the transmitter
is being sup-
plied
from the
reserve battery
if
you
switch on again
later. tor examole.
Charge
current
and charge
period
The automatic
charge circuit
for the
reserve battery
bleeds
oft a current
of about 30
mA from the charge cur-
rent
which is supplied
to the transmitter.
As most charg-
ers oroduce
a constant
current,
the main transmitter
bat-
tery
is
deprived
ot
that 30 mA, and
you
should therefore
charge
for
longer than
normal. The charge
period
should
always
be calculated
from the residual current
which is
fed to the main battery.
Here is an example:
Current
from charger
=
200 mA
Charge
period
increases by 30/200
=
0.15
=
150/0
lf
you
have a charger
with switchable or
selectable cur-
rent ranges,
you
can, of course,
increase the charge
rate
by about
30mA, and
your
normal charge
period
will be
unchanged.
Rapid-charging
The reserve
battery is always
charged at
the
"normal"
current,
i.e. at the
14-hour rate
-
even
if
you
rapid-
charge
the
main battery.
lf
you
slow-charge
the main
battery
in the normal
way, then the
reserve battery
will
always
be
fully charged.
However, if
you
usually
use a
rapid-charging
technique,
it may happen
that the charge
period
is not sufficient
to compensate
for the self-dis-
charge
tendency
oJ the reserve
battery.
This is more
likely at
high temperalures,
or if
you
do
not use the sys-
tem
for a considerable
time. For this
reason always
give
a slow
charge every
10th cycle
-
which
you
ought
to do
in any case
for other
reasons.
lf
you
have cause to use
the reserve
battery,
you
must slow-charge
the battery at
least
once before
using it again
lnstallation
Switch
the transmitter
oft, then open
the back and
place
it inverted on
the workbench.
The next step
is
to
withdraw the
battery cradle
Jrom the transmitter
case,
which is
now tacing
you.
Pull it upwards caretully,
holding
it
at both
ends
(see
Fig. 42).
Place the
reserve
battery
unit in the bottom
right-hand
corner,
over the
mounting eyes
provided
for it, and
retain it with the
4
screws
and eyelets supplied
(Fig.
43). Caution
-
make
sure
the eyelets are
the right way
round
(Fig.
44).
To
do
this,
please
refer to Fig.
46. First
pull
out the
bridging
plug
adjacent
to the
RF module; it is
no longer
needed.
A ribbon cable
is
supplied
in the set:
insert
one
ot the two
plugs
(either
will do) on
the ribbon cable
into the
vacant socket.
Now
bend
the ribbon cable
as
shown
in Fig. 47 and deploy
it as shown.
Insert the
plug
into the socket
on the reserve battery
unit.
It is not
possible
to connect this
with reversed
polarity,
but
please
refer to Fig. 47 in any case.
Fig.44
Fig.45
Select one
of the switch bays
(we
recommend bay
10),
cut away one
of the holes completely
and
install the
change-over
switch. Deploy the
connecting cable
lrom
the switch
to the battery as
shown in
Fig. 45. Take care
here, to avoid damaging
or
jamming
any ot the wires.
Once
you
have checked that
the wires are deployed
exactly
as shown
in Fig. 45, especially
where they run
around
the main battery,
and that
they cannot
get
tan-
gled,
replace the cradle
and
main battery
(the
lugs in
the
cradle must be connected
to
the mounting eyes
in
the casing).
Now
you
have to complete the
connection between
the
reserve
battery unit and the
transmitter electronics.
Fig.
42 Fig.43
Fig.45
Fig.46
Fig.
47
oc
Now check
everything one
last time. Convince
yoursell
that the
ribbon cable
cannot obstruct
the stick
mechanics.
and
vou
are
done. Close
the transmitter.
From
this time on
please
be sure
to slow-charge
your
transmitter
as often as
possible,
so that
you
can
be
sure
that the reserve
battery
is fully charged.
The
"Transmitter
Control
Test" menu
All the sliders and
switched
functions
must
be
installed
in
a
particular
orientation.
lf they are
installed the
wrong
way round, the aids
to adjustment
in the menus
will be
incorrect.
You will be aware
by now that
the
transmitter
only
"recognises"
the sliders
and switches
under
their abbreviations
E
-
I,
51
-
S5 and
LS, while
you
undoubtedly
prefer
to remember
their
English
descriptive
names.
This
menu is used
to
do
two things:
1.
You can establish
whether the sliders
and switches
are
installed the
"right
way round",
and/or con-
nected to the
main
circuit
board correctly.
This is
only usually
in
question
when
you
install extra
switches,
but it also applies
if
you
wish
to relocate
the
switches
to
suit
your personal
preference.
2. You can
tind out
quickly,
and
without opening
the
transmitter,
where any
particular
switch
(which you
know by the designation
printed
on the sticker)
is
plugged
in at the
main
circuit
board,
i.e. under
what
designation
the transmitter
"
knows" it.
But f irst a
minor correction:
the term
"transmitter
con-
trol" test
is not
quite
accurate,
because
you
cannot
test
the two transmitter
stick units
-
simply because
there
is
no need to do so.
In fact, this
menu can be
used
to tesl all the switches,
i.e. even
those which are
not strictly
"transmitter
controls'
You will
recall
(page 12) the following:
Transmitter
controls
"move"
something
on the
model
directly:
sticks and sliders
are
typical transmitter
con-
trols. But switches
can also
be transmitter
controls
if
they are
connected
to
"transmitter
control"
connec-
tions,
or
letters
-
inputs
A
-
|
(e.9.
a switched channel
switch
-
G or
H). There are also
coupling and
change-
over
switches,
which include
Dual-Rates switches
and
the
Teacher/Pupil
switch.
They
are
designated
51
-
55
and
LS.
Finally there
is the
"Memory"
change-over
switch,
which has
its
own
special
function
(see
page
68), and
which belongs
to
neither
group.
lt is
desig-
nated
"
M".
Now
we have
iogged
your
memory, back
to business:
The
TEST menu
is
under
the
"ADJUST
TRANSMIT-
TER CONTROLS"
menu. From the Status
display,
you
reach
it with
El
and
N.
Select the
point
TEST with the
Z
key. You
will
see
the following
display
(the
arrow
directions
do
not
concern
us
for the moment):
I::TF:L,IT
F
IJ
H
I
rltü='t'---
Fig.
a
Fig. b
Fig.
a
In
Figure a
you
will see the
"
names" of the coupling
and
change-over
switches;
the
"M+"
at
far right
stands
for the
"Memory"
switch.
Operate
the aileron
Dual-Rates switch
(far
left): the
arrow under
"51"
will reverse.
oo
This should
tell
you
two
things.
1. The aileron
Dual-Rates switch
is connected to
"51".
2. lf the direction of
the arrow and
the
position
of
the
switch
toggle are
the same, then
the switch
is installed
correctly.
Try the same
with the other
Dual-Rates switches
and
the Combi-Switch.
You
should
find this arrangement:
Dual Rates aileron
=
51
Dual Rates elevator
=
52
Dual Rates
rudder
=
53
Combi-Switch
=
55
This is the
"
tactory-standard
"
switch arrangement
(al-
though
you
do
not need to
keep to it). Naturally
the
arrows can
only be reversed
if the switches
are
installed. Nothing
is
connected
to these inputs as
standard-
When
you
operate
the
Memory
change-over
switch
the
"0"
(centre
position
of switch) should
change to a
"1"
ot a"2".
lf
you
subsequently
tit
another
switch,
or move an
existing switch
to a
new location,
it may be that
the
arrow direction
and
the
position
of
the switch
tog-
gle
are
not the same.
In this case
you
must turn
the
switch
itself
round. Don't
reverse the
plug
at
the
circuit
board
-
that has
no
ettect!
Now
to Fig. b,
which
you
will
not
see
until
you
press
@.
In Figure b
you
will see
the transmitter
control desig-
nations
E
-
l; under each
one either an arrow
or a
hori-
zontal
line. It
you
move the
left-hand slider
forward, the
arrow under
"E"
should also
point
forward
(up).
When
you
move the slider back,
the arrow should
reverse.
lf
you
move the slider
slowly around
its centre
point,
you
will
find a
position
at
which lhe arrow
is replaced
by a
horizontal
line. This is the exact
"electrical"
cen-
tre
point.
Component
tolerances
may
result in this
position
being slightly
different
from the scale
printed
on
the transmitter,
but in
practice
this
makes no differ-
ence.
lf no transmitter
control
is
connected
to one of the con-
trol
inputs
(G,
H, I
as
standard)
then this
horizontal line
will appear
there at all
times.
ll
a
transmitter
control
is fitted the
wrong way
round,
i.e. the direction of
the switch
toggle is
not
the same as
the direction
of the arrow
in the dis-
play,
then
reverse its
plug
at the
main
circuit
board.
$
@
Fig.48
Fig.49
5tjtliI45Ll'1+
.t. 't'
.t 't' .t .t.
til
Please note this difference
between
the
transmitter
controls
and
the other switches,
as
described
above,
It is
quite
difficult to describe
these
checks, but
you
will
find that they only
take a
moment to carry out!
Fig.50
Fig.51
Accessories
Stick
tops
The transmitter
is supplied
with 3
pairs
of stick
tops:
short,
medium-length,
and
long.
Each one
can be adjusted
in
length by about
10mm.
Select
the
length which suits
your preference.
To
adjust
or change
the stick
top, rotate the
grip
until
you
teel
it
"unlatch",
then
adjust the
length or
pull
it
off
altogether.
Slip
the new
grip
into
place,
set
it to the
required
length, then turn
it through about
180 degrees
(Fig.
52).
Stick
press-button
The long and
medium-length
stick tops
can be fitted
with a
press-button (momentary
contact),
as shown
in
Fig.
53. This can
then be used
either as a
"transmitler
control"
or as
a reversing or
coupling switch.
Using
the
press-button:
As a
transmitter control:
actuating
a tow'release
mechanism
As change-over/coupling
switch: operating
the stopwatch
Stick
switch
It is also
possible
to tit an ON/OFF
switch
to the stick
rop.
The advantage
of this
form of switch
is that
you
can
see
and
teel the current
position
of
the switch at
any
time.
Applications:
Fixed
wing: flap switch
tow
release
Helicopter:
auto-rotation
switch
The
press-button
and
switch can
only be
installed by
the
MULTIPLEX Service
Department.
Please contact
us
if
you
want the
job
done;
addresses
are
in the
aooendrx.
Relocating or
installing switches
The switches
and their
location on
the standard
transmitter
have been chosen
carefully
to meet most
modellers'
practical
requirements.
However,
you
are
free to move
the
switches
to suit
your
own
preference.
The transmitter
is supplied
with two
blank
switch
panels
and
legend sheets
to help
you.
Additional
switches are available
in
several
versions.
lf
you
wrsh to rearrange
the
layout of
your
transmittet
please
bear in
mind the following
points:
The Digi-Adjustor can
only be
titted in switch bays
1, 2,
5 and
6
(see
page
5); its
mounting bracket obstructs
one adjacent switch
bay.
lf
you
have switches
with a short
toggle
installed, other
switches
with a
long toggle should only
be fitted in
the
row
furthest from
you.
lf
you
want to change
the switch
layout
you
must first
remove
the existing
switches; undo
the
knurled nuts
using
the special spanner
supplied
with the set.
lf
you
want to re-locate
the Digi-Adjustor,
undo
the
grubscrew
and
remove
the rotary
knob.
With the switches
removed,
you
can
press
the existing
switch
panel
out of the
transmitter
from the inside,
by
squeezing
its central
snap fixing and
pushing
it out.
ll
you
wish to change
the
position
of the
Digi-Adjustor,
you
must remove
the switch
panel
first.
Please note
that
the washer on
the fixing screw
is not symmetlical,
as
the spacing
of the switch
bays
in the right/left
direction
is different
lrom the
fore/aft direction.
Turn the
washer
as necessary,
and check
that the shaft
of the
Adjustor is central
in
its hole. The
fixing screw can
be
re-tightened
when this
is the case.
It is best
to cut out
the holes
you
need in the
new
switch
panel
before
you
install
it in the transmitter.
As
the
plastic
is much
thinner at the
hole
positions,
this
can
easily be
done with a sharp,
pointed-blade
modelling
knife.
Caution:
the switch
panels
only fit one
way round
-
take care
not to cut
out the
wrong holes!
lf necessary,
the MULTIPLEX Service
Department
will help
you
out
with
a
new
panel.
Install the switch(es).
Before tightening
the fixing
nut
permanently
and deploying
the connecting
leads, run
through
the
"Transmitter
Control
Test"
(see
page
66),
to ensure
that the switches
are installed
the right
way
round.
You will
find more details
about switches
on
page
7
("Connectors
on the
main electronics
circuit
board")
and
page
12
("Transmitter
controls and
switches").
Fig.53
r-rg.52
ot
The
final
job
is to apply the self-adhesive
stickers in the
deoressions
next to the switches.
Remove
each
sticker
in turn, using a
pair
of tweezers or
fine-nosed
pliers,
place
it in the depression
in the switch
panel,
and
press
it
down
firmly
(Fig.
54).
lf we have not
provided
a sticker
printed
with
your particular
application, use the all-yel-
low stickers and
wnte
the
inscription with a felttip
pen.
Fig.54
Hand supports,
weather shield
lf
you
want to use the transmitter as a belly-mounted
unit,
hand supports
with integral folding neckstrap
bars
(Fig.
56) are
available.
Fig.56
For further details,
please
refer to the instructions sup-
plied
with the hand supports.
Frg.55
fur
$rperts
Switching
memories
"in
flight"
This new,
powerful
facility is one turther important step
towards everybody's
"dream
radio control system".
The
principle
is very simple:
For one and
the same model
you
provide
two
(or
even
three)
separate
memories. The
"lists"
stored
in
them
are different.
You can then switch between
the differ-
ent
lists
(or
memories)
at
any time.
The
differences
between the
lists
can be
as small or as
great
as
you
think
fit
-
the scope
of this teature is
really
limited only by
your
imagination. For example,
the two
lists could share the same
"basic
configura-
tion", but
have
qurte
diflerent adjustment
values. On
the other
hand,
you
might wish to have a totally differ-
ent
list that
you
can call up.
For example,
imagine a
glider
with
a complex
wing f lap
system.
You could
provide
a
"tow
launch configuration",
a
"normal
configuration" and
a
"speed
configuration".
The different configurations
would have different
move-
ments
of different
pairs
of
control
surtaces, and control
surface
throws
would
also be
difterent. Fans of the
flying
wing
layout will now be
pricking
up their ears.
Incidentally, such
"configuration
modifications" are
also used
in full-size aviation;
"f
ly
by
wire" technology
is the
key
there.
One
further
important application is
"inverted
flight
switching"
for a
helicopter. In this case several control
eflects
and basic adjustments
have to be changed
simultaneously.
The
solution
is obvious: one
memory
for
normal flying, and one
for inverted tlight.
Previous
transmitters
have
always
struggled
with
this
problem,
as so
much has to be changed.
In the case of
the
PROFI
mc 3010
you
can create
a more or less com-
pletely
"new"
list tor inverted
flight, and there are
virtu-
ally
no restrictions on
what
you
can
do.
And now the system
in
practice:
There is
little we
can
say specifically about
the
"sec-
ond"
or even
"third"
list; it all depends on
your particu-
lar application.
lf
you
aim
mainly
at changing
a few set-
tings, then
the
simplest
method
is
to copy
the
"starting
68
list", then change the appropriate
values. In other
cases
it may be necessary to create an
entirely new
list. Bear in mind that
you
are
free
to change
every
aspect
of the second list,
including modifying the mix-
ers,
re-defining the change-over switches, and so
on.
One
important
condition:
the memory to
which
you
wish to change
must
be
the next higher one in
seouence.
or
-
in the case o1 two alternative
lists
-
the next-but-one
in
seouence.
Example:
the
"normal"
memory
for
the
model is No.
11. You
can
then change to No. 12 and
No. 13.
You actually change
memories using the
"Memory"
switch.
lf
you
move
to
the
"Transmitter
control test"
(see
page
66), the screen
will
show
the memories to
which
you
can switch
in each
position.
At
one end-
point
of the switch
you
will
see
the display
"M
+ 1",
in
the other
"M
+ 2".
In our example
"M
+ 1" would be memory
No. 12;
You may have to copy
the
contents
of
your
memories
to adjacent
locations, in order to be able to switch
between
them.
Now there
is
one
more
safety
feature to be overcome.
lf
you
could switch between
one memory and
its
neighbour too easily, then one accidental
movemenl of
the switch
would be fatal. For examole,
if
the
model in
the adjacent
memory happened to be entirely different
from the one
you
were
currently
flying.
For this reason
we have
determined
that the name
of
the model must end
(eighth
character) in a
number,
il
that
memory is to be selectable
in flight.
Only
then is
it
possible
to
switch
between them.
Example: Memory
No. 7
contains
"CORT|NA1".
lf the
model in memory
No.8 is
"CORT|NA2",
then it is
pos-
sible
to switch between them.
lf Memory No.9 con-
tained
"CORTINA3",
then
you
would also be able to
select
that memory in
flight.
lf
you
try to switch memories
without naming the lists
in this
way,
you
will
just
hear a brief beep
when
you
operate the Memory Switch.
Three
turther tips on
this subiect.
1. In
the example
above
you
could
use
the names
"CORT-T11"
instead ol
"CORTINAI',
"CORT-NF2"
instead of
"CORTINA2"
and
"CORT-HS3"
instead of
"CORT|NA3".
In this case
TL
stands
for tow
launch,
NF for normal
flight, and
HS for
high speed.
The
names
will then remind
you
of which
list serves
which
purpose.
The f
inal numbers
must remain; but
they are
not
very inlormative
on their own.
2. lI
you
change
memories
in the
"normal"
way
trom
the keypad,
please
check
that the
Memory Switch
is in
the
"basic"
position.
Otherwise
the
following
will hap-
pen: you
want to change
to, say, Memory
No. 13.
Let's
suppose
that it contains
a
model list which
you
have
set up as
a
"switchable"
one.
lf the Memory
Switch
is
in the
wrong
position,
the
transmitter
immediately
changes
to the
new
memory, and instead
of No.
13
you
end uo at
No. 14 or
No. 15. This can
lead to consider-
able confusion.
3.
Please don't
use this
Jeature tor
"simple"
switching
tasks; it always
"costs"
you
one or two
memories.
For
example,
you
could execute
a simple change
of cam-
berchanging
f lap by switching
memories; but
it is
just
as easy
to use the
"Fixed
Value"
from the
Transmitter
Control
options,
and this alternative
would
not
swallow
up another
memory.
Servo
assignment
for wings
with
more than
two controlsurfaces.
On
page
26 we discussed
the
"traditional"
assigning
process
for the aileron
servos
of models
with wings
fea-
turing separately
controlled,
electronically
differentiated
ailerons.
The recommended
assignment
is as follows:
Servo
No. 1
=
Aileron 1
Servo
No. 5
=
Aileron
2
For
wings
which have
more than 2 control
surfaces,
all
of
which act
as
(mixed)
ailerons,
and all
of which are
to
feature differential
movements, this assignment
can
no
longer be
used.
Exahple:
"Quadro-flap"
arrangement
(see
page
91).
In such
cases
the servos
must be
assigned
"in
sequential
pairs".
An example
will make this
clear:
In the drawing
we show an
"extreme"
wing
layout, with
3 control surfaces
per
wing, all of which
are to work as
ailerons,
and all
of which
require diflerential
movemenl.
We
have already explained
how
you
control the six ser-
vos
(with
the
"QUADRO"
mixer); we
have
also
dis-
cussed
selecting
and adiusting
the
"Differential"
ootion. Now all
that remains
is the order
of the six ser-
vos at the assignment
stage.
In our example,
assigning
"
in sequential
pairs"
works
out
like this:
Servo
No. 1 controls QUADRO
I
Outboard
pair
Servo
No. 2
controls QUADRO I
of control
surfaces
Servo
No. 3 controls QUADRO
I
Centre
pair
Servo
No. 4 controls
OUADRO J
of control surfaces
Servo
No. 5 controls QUADRO
I
Inboard
pair
Servo
No.
6
controls
QUADRO I
of control
surfaces
This should
make everything
clear.
lf
you
have only
two
servos
per
wing
panel, (normal
Quadro
arrangement),
simply
stop at
No. 4.
lf
you
do
not keep to this sequence,
differential
aileron
movement
will not be correct.
Fig.57
The
"Sl"
switch
We have already
mentioned the
"Sl"
switch
on
page
36,
in connection
with the transmitter
control
options
"
Fixed
Value 1" and
"Fixed
Value 2".
You may have
noticed already
that
"Sl"
is offered in the
menus
when
assigning
the switches
51
-
52.
What
is
"Sl"?
"Sl"
is
another
"non-hardware"
switch,
(i.e.
a software
switch),
in this case
coupled
to the transmitter
control
input
"l".
Firstly,
"Sl"
is
a
"three-position
switch",
i.e. it
has an
"idle
position"
in the centre,
and a
"working
position"
at both
end-Points.
lf,
for example,
you
connect
a slider
control to
"1",
and
if the slider
is set
to centre, then
"Sl"
is
also
at
idle
(OFF).
lf
you
move the slider
to one end-point,
then
one
side
of
"Sl"
switches
on. lf the slider
leaves
the end-
point
again,
"Sl"
switches off
immediately.
At the other
end-point
of the slider
the same
applies;
only
in this
case
the other
"side"
of
"Sl"
is switched
on and off.
ln this case
"Sl"
has the same
effect as
if two end-
ooint switches
were
fitted to
the slider.
With
a
little
imagination
you
can use
this feature
for many
interest-
ing
functions.
The
main application
of
"Sl"
is rather simpler,
how-
ever.
In this
case a
"real
hardware"
3-stage switch
is con-
nected to
input
"1";
for
example
Order
No.7 5699
(short
toggle)
or Order
No. 7 5700
(long
toggle).
It this
"hardware"
switch
(actually
a transmitter control
in this application)
is operated,
then of course
it oper-
ates
the
"software"
switch
"Sl"
as
well. The
final
effect
is a 3-position
change-over
switch,
which can
be
used
with the switches
51
-
55;
but which
has 3
posF
tions;
compare
this with 51
-
55,
which are
only simple
change-over
switches.
And that
is exactly
what we
need to switch between
2
dif{erent
"
Fixed
Values" !
Aq
The
main application of
"Sl"
is in
conjunctlon
with
the
transmitter control options
"FlX-1"
and
"
FIX-2'.
A further example
will make eveMhing clear:
"cam-
ber-changing
flaps with 2 switchable
positions".
We will assume that transmitter control
E is assigned
to the
"FLAP"
function. Move to the
"CONTROL
OPTIONS"
menu, and from there to
"CONTROL
E:
FLAP".
Press the
N
key, and
leaf
through
to the
"FlX-l"
ootion.
Press the
!
key
("switch
corner"), switch ON with the
El
key, and then leaf through to
"1":
rE:
FLHF F I ii- 1I
L I +. lt:tttllr
After
pressing
the
Z
key
you
can
now set the first
Fixed
Value; for
example,
the
"tow-launch"
flap
posi-
tion.
While
you
are setting this up, operate the switch
so
that
you
can see the results of
your
efforts at
the
servo
itself!
Now to the second
Fixed Value:
Press the
N
key again, leaf through
with the
El
key to
the
"Flx-2"
oprion.
You will see this display:
rE:FLI]F
FIii-i!
t:ttllt/
5I
: rll.;;^r
Press the
Z
key and
you
can adjust
the other flap
position (e.9.
speed).
Here
again,
operate the switch
during the adjustment
procedure (opposite
end-point),
so that
you
can see the effect directly.
Once
you
have finished the
setting
up
process,
the
flaps can be controlled in the
lollowing way:
Switch at centre:
The Jlap servo
is
controlled by the slider.
Switch at the end-points:
The flao servo
runs
to one or
other of the
ore-selected
Dositions.
Transferring
programs
between two transmitters
Let's imagine that
you
have worked hard
at
perfecting
a
list lor
your
model
"XYZ",
and then one of
your
col-
leagues buys a kit of the same
model. lf he
also
pos-
sesses
a PROFI mc 3010,
you
can share the
fruits of
your
hard work with him by transferring a copy of
your
program
to his transmitter. You may even
find
that
your
dealer,
as a special service,
will
copy
into
your
trans-
mitter a suitable
list for
the
helicopter he has
just
sold
you.
Programs
(model
lists)
can be
transferred in either
direction between
two PROFI mc 3010 transmitters.
As
you
will
see,
this is a very simple matter.
All
you
need
is
the transfer
lead,
Order
No. I 5120.
You
can
transter in either direction:
From
your
transmitter
to
another
transmitter
("
Export").
From
another
transmitter to
yours ("lmport").
Transfening data between lwo transmitters
is the
same
as copying
from one memory to another.
The
destina-
tion
for
a
transfer is therefore always the current
memory, which
you
have selected
in
your
transmitter.
For IMPORT that
is
exactly
what is required.
For
EXPORT this means that
you
must take care.
We will assume that
you
have
selected
memory 05 as
the current
memory. lf
you
now EXPORT from memory
12, then
memory 05 in the destination transmitter
will
be overwritten,
regardless of which memory
is
current
in that transmitter.
For this reason
you
should always
IMPORT if
you
are
in any doubt,
rather than risk overwriting a colleague's
memory.
First
IMPORT.
Connect the two
transmitters with the transfer lead, by
inserting the
plugs
in the two charge sockets. Switch
both transmitters
on.
On
the transmitter which
is
to
70
IMPORT select the target or destination
memory
(=
current
memory) using the
SHIFT
MEMORY
menu.
Move to the COPY
MEMORY menu with
EIS)Z
.
Release
MODE with
the
Z
key
and
leaf through with
the
El
key until
you
reach the
IMPORT mode.
The display
will look like
this:
rt']ütiE
!
I t'lFrlE:T
rFF:f'l
.
rirt !
Ei:TEE:H
Now
you
have to inform
your
transmitter the
memory in
the second
transmitter from which it
is
to
fetch
data.
To
do this
press
N
and select the desired source
memory
number using
E
or
E.
In our example this
is memory
09. The display should
now look like this:
r[,][t[:'E
:
It'lFt:tFjT
rFF:t'l,
t:l'-1 :
EiiTEFjH
Press the
E)
key and
you
are done.
The transfer takes
place
in a fraction of a second after
you press
the key.
lf
you
now
take a
look
at
your
current memory
you
will
Jind
that
it
contains
the same data as memory 09
in
the
source transmitter.
lf for any reason the transter does
not take
place (e.9.
laulty cable, cable
not
plugged
in, source transmitter
not switched on),
your
transmitter will show the
mes-
sage
"MODE:-Error-".
Put the
problem
right
and
try
the transfer
again.
EXPORT.
This is
a similar
operation, so
we
can cut down
the
explanation.
First move to the
"SHIFT
MEMORY"
menu
and select
the
memory which, in the second transmitter,
is
to be
the destination of the data transfer.
Move
to the
"COPY
MEMORY"
menu, then
to
"
MODE:EXPORT".
Activate the source
memory
using
the
Sl
key.
The display
should
look like this,
with the memory
number
06
Jlashing:
rf'lü['E
:
E:":FüFtT
rFFlt''1.
ut: FiEITH
Press
the
@
key, and the data
will
be
transferred.
Two further
points:
1. ll
you
should
wish to interrupt an
import, export,
copy or delete
process
atter
you
have started, simply
switch
the transmitter
off briefly.
The data
in
the
model
memories
will then be unchanged.
2. To ensure
that import/export
is
possible
between all
versions
of the transmitter,
this
f
unction
is only
possi-
ble
with memories
1
to
15 and
Mx.
The
FIXED
VALUE
virtual
"transmitter
control"
lf
you
wish to operate a
servo with a stick
(or
a
function
switch),
you
do not
need to
"lose"
a transmttter
control
for the
purpose.
Assuming, that
is, that all
you
need
are
two fixed servo
positions.
Assign
first:
Move to the
ASSIGN/SERVO
menu
with
@Z[!N.
Select
the servo
you
wish to use,
press
the
Z
key, and
assign
it to the
FIXED VALUE
"transmitter
control".
When
you
assign
the
"genuine"
transmitter control,
FIXED
VALUE
will not
appear.
Set up
as tollows:
Move to the
ADJUST / SERVO
/ TRAVEL
+ REVERSE
menu
with the sequence
@ Z Z,
and
select the
servo
which
you
have assrgned
to
FIXED VALUE.
Finally
press
S,
and
set the servo
position
for the first switch
position.
In the
"SWITCH
SERVO"
menu
you
now
have to
determine
which switch
is associated
with the fixed
vatue.
The servo
position
for the second
switch
position
is
determined
in the menu ADJUST/SERVO/CENTRE.
To
be able
to do this,
you
must
first
go
back by one
menu
level with the
m
key, and activate
Centre adjustment
with
!
. Now
move the
physical
switch to the
other
end-point,
press
the
Z
key, and set the desired
sec-
ond
position
for the
servo.
ll. Tho
reeeiYing
s1stem
Connecting
servos
and
batteries
The
receiver
is the
"heart"
of
the receiving
system.
Servos,
motor
controllers,
switch
modules and
MULTINAUT-p|uS
receiver
modules
are connected
directly
to it.
The
receiver battery
is connected
to the
receiver via a
"switch
harness"
(Fig.
60).
Fis.60
The receiver
servo output
sockets are
numbered
from
l to a
maximum
oJ 10, depending
on the
number of
servos
which can
be connected.
Each servo
output
corresoonds
to
one control
function.
For reasons
of space, certain
output sockets
on the
smaller
receivers are combined,
so
that two servos
can
be connected
to one socket.
This type
ol
socket
is
marked,
for example,
"8/9".
Only one
servo can be
connected directly,
and
this is always
the
lower
number;
in this case channel
8.
What
if
you
need both
functions?
In this case
you
need
an expansion
adapter
(Order
No.8 5060),
which con'
sists
of a
plug
and two sockets.
The
plug
is connected
to the
receiver socket;
the two servos
are connected
to
the
two sockets
on the adapter
(Fig.
61).
Fig.61
71
The switch
harness
This
is
plugged
into socket
"
8". The switch
incorpo-
rated
in the harness
is used to
turn the whole
receiving
syslem
on and
otf. The switch
itself can be
installed
in
the model's
fuselage side.
Switch
harnesses
are available
in several
forms;
please
refer to the
main MULTIPLEX
catalogue
for
details.
Some
versions are
fitted with a separate
socket
for charging
the receiver battery.
On the switch
harness supplied
with the set
(Order
No. I 5100)
the
charge socket
is integral
with the switch casing.
This
means
that the battery
can be recharged
without
hav-
ing
to open up the
model
(Fig.
62).
Fig.62
PPM or
PCM?
PCM
(Pulse
Code
Modulation)
is
the
more
"intelligent"
of the
two transmission
methods.
In the case of
PCM
the
information
is
encoded
by the transmitter.
The
receiver is able
to recognise
interference, and contin-
ues lo send
the last
"good"
signals to the servos
until
it again
receives a signal
from the transmitter
(see
Fail
Safe).
Thus PCM eliminates
servo
jittering.
On the
other hand, this
interference suppression
can
lead to the PCM
pilot
failing to
notice interference until
much later than
with a PPM system.
PPM
(Pulse
Position Modulation) still
has the advan-
tage if
you
require ultrajast control
response
from
your
model, because
the
information is broadcast
by the
transmitter
at a
faster rate than bv a
PCM transmitter.
Which types
of
receiver
can
be used?
PCM
All
MULTIPLEX
PCM receivers can
be used
with
your
new transmitter.
PPM
when set
to PPM, the transmitter
broadcasts
either
7
or I channels
(see page
13 for method
of switching).
This
means that
you
can
use all
MULTIPLEX
FM PPM
receivers
(and
all FM
PPM receivers
which can
decode
at
least 7 channels)
with this transmitter.
Fail-Safg
("emergency
position"
lor
servos)
Only
available
with PCM-DS
receivers!
After about
0.8 seconds
of interference
the throttle
servo
runs to the
250lo
Dosition,
and all
the other ser-
vos are
automatically
reset to centre.
Fail-sate
is
a
fea-
ture
of the
receiver, and
must be switched on
before
it can
work.
Single-superhet
or double-superhet?
lf
you
operate
your
model
in the vicinity of a
powerful
VHF radio
transmitter
(frequency
range
103 to
105
MHz), conventional
radio control systems
(single-su-
perhet)
in the
35 MHz band can
suffer
from interfer-
ence.
In technical terms:
the
powerful
transmitter
pro-
duces
adjacent-channel
interlerence
to the single-su-
perhet
receiver. The double-superhet
receiver utilises
different
technology
which eliminates the
problem
alto-
gether
72
Arrangement
of battery,
servos
and
receiver
The diagram below
shows
the most
favourable
arrangement
of the
RC
system
components
in the
model. We
recommend that
you
decide
exactly
how
your
system
is to be installed
in the new
model
before
vou start construction.
Servo Switch
Receiver
Fig.63
The
receiver
When installing the
receiver
in the model,
please
observe
the
following
points:
a
Keep the
receiver
well
away
trom
powerf
ul electric
motors and electric
ignition systems.
.
Lead the receiver aerial
out o{ the
model by the
shortest
possible
route.
o
Protect the receiver
from vibration by
wrapping
it in
foam rubber and stowing
it
loosely in the model.
.
Never alter
the length of
the receiver aerial.
.
Deploy the receiver aerial
in as straight
a line as
possible.
Never leave it coiled up
in the
model.
a
lf
your
model
incorporates carbon
f ibre reinforce-
ments, do not deploy
the receiver aerial
inside the
fuselage
(signal
screening)
.
Do not stick the
receiver aerial
to any
part
of the
model
which is reinlorced
with carbon
fibre
(signal
screenrng).
Range
testing
Range testing
can make a significant
improvement to
safety
levels when
you
are
operating
your
model.
We
have cooked
up a standard
recipe
for range testing
based
on our own experience
and
measurements.
lf
your
system
passes
this test,
you
can be sure
you
are
on the
safe side.
1.
Collapse
your
transmitter
aerial
lully.
2. Ask an assistant
to
hold
your
model
about
1 m
above
the
ground.
3. Check
that
there are no
large metal
items
(cars,
wire
fences etc.) close to
the model.
4, Make
sure that
no other transmitters
are switched
on
(even
on different
channels)
when
you
carry
out
the
test.
5.
Switch
on
your
transmitter
and
receiver. When the
transmitter
is
80
m trom the
model the equipment
should be able
to
pass
the
following test:
PPM system:
the control surfaces
should
still
respond immediately
to stick
movements, and
make
no uncontrolled
movements at all.
PCM system:
the control
surfaces should
still
respond
promptly
to stick
movements.
The inherent
interference suppression
of a
PCM system
prevents
servos
jittering.
lf
the signal
received
is not strong
enough,
then a
PCM receiver
will continue
to
pass
the last
received signal
to the servos.
The servos
will then either
not respond
to stick movements,
or
will hesitate before
responding.
ll
your
model
is fitted with a
motor, repeat the
test with
the motor
running.
Interference
suppression
with
magnetic/electronic
ignition systems
.
Screen
the
ignition lead
with a metal tube,
fixed
(earthed)
to the
motor crankcase
close to
the igni-
tion coil.
a
Use screened
plug
connectors
at all
times.
a
Never
power
the ignition system
from
the receiver
battery.
a
Keep a distance
of at least
15 cm between
the igni-
tion system
and all
the
RC
system
components
(in-
cluding
the
receiver battery).
.
Keep the
leads from the
ignition battery
and the
other components
as
short as
possible,
and suffi-
ciently
thick
(min.
0.5 sq
mm).
.
The
ignition switch should
be
rated at a minimum
of
10
A
(minimum
voltage drop).
Notes on
servos
The servo
torque for a
particular
control
surface
can
usually
be
calculated
with sufficient
accuracy
using
the following
rough
formula:
0.75
x control surface
area
(in
sq cm/100)
=
torque
(in
cm/kg).
In large
models
it is often
necessary to extend
servo
leads.
lf
you
intend titting extension
leads,
please
note
that they
affect
reception conditions.
ll
the
lead is more
than
60 cm
long
you
musl use
a separation
filter. lf
other
servo
leads run
parallel
to these
long leads
for a
distance
of more than
25 cm, then
the shorter
leads
should
also be
fitted
with
separation
filters. There are
two
alternative
methods:
Separation
tilters for direct connection
(O.
No. I5083)
This
lead
is
simply
connected
between
the receiver
outDut
and the
servo connector.
Extension
lead with separation
filter
(60
cm: Order
No. I5082
120 cm: Order
No. I5083)
Extension
lead set with separation
filter
(max.
2 m:
Order
No.
I5138)
This is a kit
which can be used
to connect
servos
which are built
into
wings or other
parts
of the model.
Airborne
power
supplies
Receiver battery
You can use
the lollowing
rough tormula
to calculate
the
receiver battery capacity
required
in a
particular
model:
0.2 Ah
x No. of servos
=
battery
capacity
in Ah
For example, a
model with 5 servos
should be
fitted
with a
1 Ah receiver battery.
A
good
idea is to
go
one
step
further and select
the
"next
size up",
provided
that weight and
space are
not a
problem.
Switch
harnesses
The switch
harness is connected
to the battery and
the
receiver. Some
switch
harnesses
(e.9.
Order
No.8
5100)
have an
integral charge socket.
lJ the switch
is
installed
in the model's side
you
can
recharge the
receiver battery
without having to open
the model.
Diagnosis
(closed
loop) operation
For checking
and making adjustments,
the transmitter
and
receiving system can
be
linked by the Diagnosis
Lead
(Order
No.
I5105).
The
model must be
fitted with
a switch
lead with
integral charge/diagnosis
socket
(Order
No. 8 5100).
The RF
module in the transmitter
is
switched
out of circuit
automatically,
and can
even
be
removed.
Closed-loop
operation:
-
saves
power;
as
no RF signal
is
produced
or radi-
ated by
the transmitter
its current
consumption
droDs
to about 330/o
of the
normal value;
-
disturbs
nobody, because
the
RF module
is not
functioning.
-
cannot
suffer
interference, because
RF signals
are
ignored by the
receiver.
lmportant:
You can
only carry out closedloop
checking
if none of
the stick
functions
has been
released as a
Pupil func-
tion
(see
pages
74174:
Teacher/Pupil
operations).
When
you pull
out
the
plug
from the transmitter,
the
RF
module is switched
into circuit
again,
which could
interfere
with
your
fellow modellers.
So: be sure
to
switch
the
transmitter off
before dis-
connecting
the
plug!
Care
of the
transmitter
Storage
Protect
your
PROFI mc 3010
from:
.
mechanical damage
.
ambient
temperatures
above
60 degrees C
(sun-
shine in a car)
a
damp, solvents,
model
fuel, exhaust
residue
.
dust
(in
the workshop).
Please
bear in
mind that condensation
may form on
and
in the transmitter
il
you
move it
from
your
warm
workshoo to a cold
car or
vice versa. Condensation
73
may
prevent
the transmitter
working
properly.
lf
you
are not sure,
carry out a careful
range test, and
let lhe
transmitter
warm up or cool
down thoroughly.
The
transmitter
should be
completely dry
inside.
Cleaning
the transmitter
Take
great
care that
no liquids
get
inside the
transmit-
ter when
you
are
cleaning the case.
Do not use any
abrasive or solvent-based
cleaner on
the transmitter
case. A
mild household cleaner
is
quite
adeauate.
Dust is best
removed with a soft
paintbrush.
Maintenance
Your PROFI
mc
3010
transmitter contains
no
parts
which
reouire maintenance. Nevertheless
it is an
essential
safety
measure to
check
radio range and all
working tunctions
periodically.
The transmitter battery
Please
note that new battery
packs
do
not achieve
their
full capacity until after about
10 charge/discharge
cycres.
.
Charge
new,
rapid-charge
batteries
(or
packs
which
have
not
been used
for a long time) at
least three
times at
the normal
(slow)
rate
before
rapid- charg-
ing them.
a
Do
not rapid-charge a battery unless
you
cerlain
that
it was designed
for it.
.
Charge up batteries
only when the ambient
tem-
perature
is in the range 0
to 40 degrees C.
o
Avoid
placing
mechanical
stress on the
power
leads
and
on the cells themselves.
.
Replace old batteries
in
good
time.
.
NC
packs
fall into the category
of dangerous
waste, and must be disposed
of
properly.
Don't
just
chuck
them
in the rubbish bin!
Storing batteries
11
you
do
not use
your
transmitter
for
a
long
period,
take special
note of the following
points:
State
of charge
Experience shows that
NC
packs
should be stored
in a
discharged
(empty)
state.
Self-discharge
NC
packs
lose about 10lo of their charge
per
day
under
unfavourable
conditions,
i.e.
after
three months' stor-
age they are
generally
completely
flat.
Maintenance charging
The transmitter battery can be
kept topped up, ready
for use at any time, by
charging it constantly at about
70 mA. The MULTIPLEX Combi-Charger
Order No.
14
5540 includes a
70 mA output.
MULTIPLEX
Hot-Line
For
questions
regarding the transmitter and
its
use
our
Teleohone Service
is available.
You
can call
us Mon-
day
to Thursday between
2.00 and 4.00
pm
on the
fol-
lowing number: 01049
-7233-7390.
Types of servo
The right servo
lor
every
application
Servos
are
the muscles of
your
radio
control
system.
They
move the control surtaces
and steering
linkages,
operate
throttle arms and
brakes, switches and
release
mechanisms.
For most
purposes
a
high-quality
"all-
round" servo
is
quite good
enough.
These servos usu-
ally
ofter the best
price
:
performance
ratio.
Principal differences
in servos:
Type ot output
Most servos
are of the
"rotary-output"
type.
The out-
put
arm rotates, usually
through an angle
ol +l-
45
degrees.
For special
purposes
-
e.g. for retractable
undercarriages
-
there are
high-power servos
which
move through
+/- 90 degrees.
In some types of
instaF
lation a
linear-output servo
offers distinct advantages.
The
fundamental disadvantage
is that
it is not
possible
to alter
servo travel by
fitting a longer or shorter
output
lever, as is the case
with rotary servos.
Power
(torque)
Servo
power
is
determined
by the
power
ol
the motor
and
the reduction
ratio of the
gearbox.
Greater
power
requires a
more
powerful
motor
(which
consumes
more current) or a
higher
gear
reduction
ratio
(which
slows
down
its response).
lf speed
is unimportant
-
e.g.
for a retractable under-
carriage
-
the slow
Power Servo is the best solution.
In large,
heavy models our
Profi
Servos
come into their
own.
They offer outstanding
power
combined
with high
soeed.
lf several
Profi
servos
are used
in a model,
you
should always select
a receiver battery
with a
larger than
normal capacity.
74
Speed
Servo
speed, as
in
a car,
is a tunction of
gearbox
ratios.
A low reduction ratio
gives
high speed, at the
expense
oJ
power.
For
most applications our standard
servos
are
quite
fast
enough.
Only extremely
high-
speed
models
require
specialised
Speed Servos.
Resolution
(accuracy)
This is where the orecision
of a servo
manifests itself.
Our
top models achieve
a resolution
figure ol O.2o/o.
Dimensions
and weight
For
some
purposes
-
especially
for
wing installation
-
by far the
most important
requirement is minimum
size, combined
with
plenty
of
power.
For such cases
we
recommend our Pico Servo.
The mc
servo
family
(or:
the computer
in
your
servo)
Our
mc servos are
controlled by a
micro-processor
and orovide characteristics
which have never been
possible
with
conventional
technology.
For example:
.
higher continuous
performance
.
smaller deadband
.wider
operating
voltage range
o
programmability
The servos
in this family
-
Micro-mc, Royal-mc, Profi-
mc, Power-mc
and Jumbo-mc
-
are
capable of solving
many an unusual
and
intractable
problem.
Sp_ecialist-terms
ref,erri ng
tci
fixed-wing
aircraft
Spoilers:
A'vague
term used
for any
part
of
the control system
which
primarily produces
drag
(and
sometimes aftects
wing
lift). For example: airbrakes,
rotating trailing
edge
brakes
or
camber-changing
flaps
which
can
be de-
tlected
more than 30 degrees
negative
or
positive.
Dividing the
flaperon into two
makes it
possible
to set
up
the functions
ol aileron and camber-changing
tlap
more efficiently
in aerodynamic
terms,
particularly
on
long-span
wings
(better
lift distribution and
improved
aileron
response).
In the
interests of
good
aileron
response,
the aileron
movement
of the outboard
control surface
should be
greater
than that of the
inboard surface;
on the other
hand, the llap
movement oJ the
inboard control surface
should
be
greater
than that of the
outboard surface,
to
ensure docile
stall behaviour.
camber-changing
flaps
(or
simply
flaps)
Fis 65
Control
surfaces
at the trailing
edge of the
wing, used to
vary the camber
of the
wing section, and thus
also the
characteristics
of the
wing, to suit
particular
Jlight
requirements.
Positive def lections
(flaps
down)
produce
an
increase
in the wing's
lift
coeflicient
(slow
flight), with
a slight
increase in drag. Small
negative deflec-
tions,
around
2
-
3 degrees,
reduce drag
for high-speed
llight.
lf flaps
are deflected
more than about
+30 degrees,
drag
rises considerably.
Flaps
make
a
usetul
landing
aid
(spoilers,
crow system).
Flaperons:
Fuli-span
control surtaces
at the
wing trailing edge,
which
double as
ailerons and
camber-changing
flaps.
Aibron Carn!,or
-
charu|.ng
naB
crow system
(aileron
brakes)
Fis 68
An
extension
of
the
"Quadro"
mixed function, utilising
the mixed control
surlaces as
"spoilers".
The inboard
control surfaces
are set to a
positive
braking
position
(flap
down),
the outboard surfaces
to a negative
braking
position
(flap
up). Used on
high-performance
gliders
(F3B
class)
which are
not Jitted with
proper
airbrakes or
sooilers.
Oandr€r
-
a*Lnging
lt
p
spolbr
Fig.69
camber-changing
flaps.
Snap-flaps:
Mixed
function: elevator
-
Cambr-
cha.qang nap
Often used
on aerobatic
models
to reinforce
the effect
of the
elevator.
lf up-elevator
is applied,
the camber-
changing
flaps are deflected
down; the
result is an
increase
in the wing's
lift coefficient.
Down-elevator
is
accompanied
by up{lap,
and the
wing's
litt
coefficient
is
reduced.
The overall effect
is that the aircraft
is capable
of
very tight
looping manoeuvres
-
ideal for the
"square"
figures.
Fig. 70
V-tail
(or
"
buttertly
tail')
Combined elevator
and
rudder in the
form of a
"V".
When elevator
is applied,
both control
surfaces
move in
the same
direction.
When rudder
is applied, they
move
in opposite
directions.
Fig.66
Delta
("elevons"):
Full-length
control
surfaces at
the wing trailing
edge, on
models
without a tailplane
(delta,
flying wing).
The
elevons
double
as ailerons
and elevators.
euadro:
Fis 6/
Full-length
control
surfaces
(flaperons)
divided
into two
separate
flaps
per
wing.
Each control surface
doubles
as aileron
and
camber-changing
tlap.
Carnber
-
cttarying
lbB
Apoibr
TC
Diffierential:
Term used
lor unequal
aileron
movements,
intended to
compensate
for the
"
negative"
roll effect,
otherwise
known
as adverse
yaw.
lf ailerons
move an
equal amount
up and down,
the
aileron
on
the outside of
the turn
produces
a
yawing
moment
in the opposite direction
to that
oJ the turn, due
to the
increase
in
drag;
an increased
rudder
movement
is then
required
to
counler
the
yaw.
This makes
for ditficult control
characteristics
and a
loss
ot efficiency,
which can be
very noticeable
in large span
model
gliders.
Unequal
aileron
mo/emenb
(much
more up movement
than do!\,n) can
reduce
this effect
greatly,
or even eliminate
it altogether.
The effect
of adverse
yaw
varies
from model to
model,
depending
on the aircraft's
geometry
and
wing sections.
For
this
reason it
is
always
necessary
to carry out
practical
tests.
As a
good
starting
point
we recommend
1000/o
ulmovement,
and 500/o-700lo
down-movement.
Some
helicopter
terms
Swashplate:
This comoonent
mixes and transfers
all control
move-
ments from the
fixed control
mechanisms to the
rotating
rotor blades.
Collective
pitch
variation:
Generally
known as collective
pitch,
or simply
"collec-
tive".
Variation
in the
pitch
angle
of all
rotor blades at
the
same
time, to control
lift.
It no change
is made to cyclic
pitch,
the
resultant
lift
force is coincident
with the
rotor
shaft.
Cyclic
pitch
variation:
Generally
known as
"cyclic
pitch",
or simply
"cyclic".
A variation
in rotor blade
pitch
which alters over
the
course
of one
rotation. The effective
result
is that the
olane
of the
rotor blades
is tilted, and the
resultant
lift
force
is no longer coincident
with the
rotor shaft.
lt is
used
lor:
Ditch-axis control:
The resultant
lift force of the
rotor is tilted
forward or
back
(when
viewed from behind
the model,
looking
for-
ward). Corresponds
to up-
and down-elevator
on a
Jixed-wing
aircraft.
roll-axis control:
The
resultant
lift force oJ the
rotor is tilted to
right or left.
Corresponds
to aileron
movement
on a
fixed-wing air-
craft.
Tail rotor:
Produces
a torce
which counteracts
the torque
of the
main
rotor
in
single-rotor
helicopters.
Used
for
yaw
con-
trol, corresponding
to
rudder control
in
a
fixed-wing air-
craft.
Gyro:
The
gyro
registers unwanted
yaw-movements,
and
sends
appropriate
corrective
signals
to the tail
rotor
control system.
As
every
control command
involving
the
main
rotor results
in
a
change
in main rotor torque,
the
gyro
is an
important aid to the
pilot.
Gyro suppression:
This system
reduces or entirely
suppresses
the effect
of
the
gyro,
so
that the
pilot
can
effect
last, intentional
movements around
the
yaw
axis.
Pitch^hrottle
curve:
ln
an
ideal
helicopter the
rotor
speed
would remain con-
stant at
all motor
power
settings;
this is achieved
by
opening
and closing
the
throttle whenever
collective
Ditch
is increased or decreased.
The relationship
between
collective
pitch
and throttle
can be considered
in the
form of a
graph,
or
"curve";the
throttle
signal
is
derived
from the
collective
pitch
signal.
76
"3-Doint
curve":
Corner
points
for minimum collective,
hover collective
and
maximum collective
pitch.
"s-ooint
curve":
As above, but
wilh two additional
points
between
the
corner
points
mentioned above.
The s-point curve
allows the
rotor
power
requirements to be
matched
more accurately
to the
motor's
power
output character-
istics.
Throttle
pre-select (ldle-Up):
Throttle setting
for rotor
idle speed under
"no{oad"
conditions.
"Schlueter"
control system
:
A seoarate servo
is used
tor each
of the three
func-
tions
collective
pitch,
oitch-axis
and roll-axis.
Characteristic
feature: the
swashplate
cannot
move
-\
axially; collective
pitch
is
controlled
by means
of a
oushrod
located
inside the
hollow
rotor shaft
Fig.71
"Heim"
control system:
The Junctions collective
oitch
and roll are
mixed
electronically
and
passed
to two servos.
These ser-
vos control
the swashplate
in the
"righVleft"
and
"
uo/down" directions.
The oitch-axis
function is
mechanically
de-coupled
Jrom collective
pitch.
A
separate
pitch-axis
servo
controls
the
pitch-axis
movement
of the swash-
Dlate.
Soecial
feature:
mechanF
cal
flare compensation
is
Dossible.
"CPM"
control system
(HEAD
Mlx):
Abbreviation
for
Collective
Pitch lvlixing. The control sig-
nals for collective
pitch, pitch-axis
and
roll-axis are elec-
tronically
"composed"
and
sent to the servos.
Between
servos
and swashplate
there are
no mixer levers or
similar
mechanics, so
mechanical complexity
is min-
imised.
Virtual swashplate
rotation:
lf a 3-
(or
more) bladed rotor
is mounted on a swash-
plate
intended for a 2-bladed system,
then the
tilt of the
swashplate
no longer corresponds
to the
inclination of
the rotor disc, as
it is not
possible
in design terms to
locate
the mechanical
linkage to each blade of a
mul-
ti-blade
rotor at a
point
90
degrees in advance
of its
highest
point.
lf
the swashplate
control system cannot
be
rotated through
the
appropriate
angle
to match the
blade system,
the
pitch-axis
and
roll-axis servo signals
can be
mixed electronically to achieve
an apparent
(vir-
tual)
rotation ot the swashplate.
Arrangrm€d
9d
Frequency
bands, channels,
crystals
and spot
frequencies
Four
frequency bands are available
for
the
control
ot
models in the U.K.:
27
l\llqz
band
35
MHz
band
(A
und
B
band)
40
MHz
band
459 MHz band
The latter band
is used
very little
at
present;
the
PROFI
mc 3010
transmitter and
receiver are only available
on
the first three bands.
The easiest
way of
imagining frequency bands
is to
compare
them with the
wavebands on
your
radio. Think
of long
wave
(LW),
medium wave
(MW),
and so
on.
On
your
radio
you
can
probably
change
bands by
pressing
a
knob. With radio control
equipment
we
can't
do that:
the transmitter
has
an
RF module
which has to
be changed.
The receiver, on the other
hand,
must
be
swapped
for
a
new one.
A channel,
or spot frequency,
is a narrow section
of one
frequency band.
Going back
to our
radio
analogy,
a
spot
frequency
corresponds
to one radio
transmitter, or
station.
Instead ol
the frequencies themselves,
which
are diff
icult to
remember, we use standardised
channel
numbers.
The crystals
in the transmitter and
receiver determine
the
frequency and the channel.
They must therefore
be
matched to each other
with extreme
precision.
That is
whv:
Always use
genuine
MULTIPLEX crystals
in
your
MULTIPLEX radio control
equipment!
The
channel
number
is
always
printed
on
one face of
the crystal.
next to it
you
will see either
an
"S"
(Sender
=
transmitter)
or an
"E"
(Empfaenger
=
receiver).
Transmitter crystals
are enclosed
in a transparent
blue
casing, and
"normal"
receiver crystals
in a transparent
vellow one.
Caution:
Ordinary
receiver crystals
cannol
be used
with dou-
ble-suoerhet
receivers.
Double-superhets
require
special types
(DS
crys-
tals).
They are fitted
with
an
integral colourless
plas-
tic
holder
(Fig.
66).
Fig. 66
77
69

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Multiplex PROFImc3010 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Multiplex PROFImc3010 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,25 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Multiplex PROFImc3010

Multiplex PROFImc3010 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 78 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info